JP6717796B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine (so-called spinning drum type gaming machine) which is a kind of gaming machine, a card (for example, a storage medium such as a prepaid card) from a card unit (so-called CR unit) There are things that remind you to remember to take them out. For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, two areas near the firing handle are used to remind the user to remember to take out the card.

JP, 2013-090762, A (especially paragraph [0246], FIG. 32, etc.)

Nowadays, it is desired to devise a method of calling attention not only to remembering to take out a card, but also to a dent.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can effectively call attention to the intrusion.

A gaming machine that solves the above problem is a gaming machine capable of producing a specific state in which a special state is generated after a special display result is derived and a guidance effect for guiding a profitable operation is executed . A reel, a transmissive display, a backlight, and special visual control means for performing special visual control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the reel, and the transmissive display is arranged in front of a plurality of reels. The display area of the display includes a reel visual recognition area where the reels arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized, and a predetermined caution is issued in the display area of the transmissive display different from the reel visual recognition area. An image is displayed and alerting regarding indentation is performed, and in the transmissive display, after the final game in the special state, the predetermined alerting image is displayed so that alerting regarding intrusion is performed. In the special state, after the last game in the special state, the special visual recognition control is executed, and the transmissive display, after the last game in the specific state, When a predetermined attention image is displayed, a warning regarding the intrusion is executed, and when the attention regarding the intrusion after the final game in the specific state is executed, the special visual recognition control is executed. When the special visual recognition control is executed, the backlight installed behind the reel is turned off, and one color image is displayed in the reel visual recognition area .

Regarding the above-mentioned gaming machine, the gaming machine is configured such that a game medium is returned to the player by operating a specific operation unit operable by the player, and a bet number is set. If the game can be played under the condition, and the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion after the final game in the special state is started, the bet is executed during the alerting regarding the intrusion after the final game in the special state. When the number is set, while the execution of the alerting regarding indentation ends, while the specific operating unit is operated while performing the alerting regarding intrusion after the last game in the special state The execution of the alert may be continued .
The gaming machine includes a specific movable body and operation control means for controlling the operation of the specific movable body, and when the specific movable body does not operate, the operation of the specific movable body in a front view. There is a case where the predetermined caution image is displayed in a display area of the transmissive display that overlaps the area, and a warning regarding the intrusion is executed, and when the specific movable body operates, the display of the transmissive display is performed. The predetermined reminder image is displayed in the display area of the transmissive display which is a display area different from the reel visual recognition area and which does not overlap with the operation area of the specific movable body in a front view. You may make it warn about the sneaking in .

Regarding the gaming machine , in the advantageous period including the period controlled in the special state and the period controlled in the specific state, the advantageous period is triggered by the end condition of the advantageous period being satisfied. When the special condition is generated and the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, the special state is generated when the special state is generated after the last game in the special state. By doing so, it may be different from the mode of calling attention to the inset that is executed after the final game in the special state when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied .

According to the present invention, it is possible to effectively carry out the alerting regarding the depression.

The figure which shows the machine front side of a slot machine. The figure which shows the production button. The figure which shows an information panel. The figure which shows the pushing order of a stop button. The figure which shows a part and a prize. The figure which shows a game state. The figure which shows the state of production. (A) is a figure which shows the determination rate of the ceiling frequency according to an internal mode, (b) is a figure which shows the determination rate of the internal mode of the transfer destination according to an internal mode. The figure which shows the electric constitution of a slot machine. The figure which shows the winning probability of various bonus combinations according to a setting value. The flowchart which shows a game progress main process. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the effect display device when a navigation effect is performed. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the effect display device when a payment effect is performed, (b) is an example of the display content of the effect display device when alerting about the return of a storage medium is performed. FIG. The figure which shows the execution start condition of standby production. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the effect display apparatus when a standby effect is performed. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the effect display apparatus when a standby effect is performed. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the effect display device when a menu is displayed, (c) is an example of the display content of the effect display device when it becomes the display content regarding volume adjustment. The figure which shows, (d) the figure which shows one example of the display contents of the production display device when it becomes the display contents regarding production explanation. The flowchart which shows a special stagnation process. (A) is a figure which shows the determination probability of the production content of the appearance production according to a setting value, (b) is a figure which shows the determination probability of the production content of the starry sky production according to an internal mode. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of an effect display device when an ending effect is performed after the game of the last time in a bonus game state. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the effect display device when ending production is performed after the last game in an advantageous production state. The figure which shows an example of the game arcade where the slot machine and the pachinko game machine are installed. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the effect display device when the alerting regarding inset after the last variation game in the 1st bonus game state is performed, (b) is the last time in an advantageous effect state The figure which shows an example of the display content of the production|presentation display apparatus when the alerting regarding the inset after the change game is performed, (c) is the production|presentation display apparatus when the alerting regarding the inset during execution of a standby production is performed. The figure which shows an example of a display content. (A)-(c) is a figure explaining after completion|finish of a 1st bonus game state, after completion|finish of a single bonus game state, and after completion|finish of a 1st advantageous production state. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the effect|action when a settlement process is performed when a settlement button is operated. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the settlement button is operated after the winning of the bell role, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of effects when the settlement button is operated after the winning of the replay role .. The flowchart which shows the special stagnation process in 2nd Embodiment. (A) and (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the production|presentation display device when the opening production is performed before the first game in the bonus game state of 2nd Embodiment, (c) and (d). ) Is a diagram showing an example of display contents of the effect display device when the opening effect is executed before the first game in the advantageous effect state of the second embodiment. In (a) to (c), in the second embodiment, a case where a first bonus combination is won and a first bonus game state is generated, and a single bonus combination is won and a single bonus game state is generated. The figure explaining the case and the case where an promotion re-play combination wins and is controlled by the 1st advantageous production state. The flowchart which shows the special stagnation process in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the effect display device when an interval effect is performed in the bonus game state in 3rd Embodiment, (c) and (d) are 3rd. The figure which shows an example of the display content of the effect display apparatus when an interval effect is performed in the advantageous effect state in the embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure explaining the time of being in the 1st bonus game state, and the time of being in the 1st advantageous production state in a 3rd embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the production|presentation display apparatus when the alerting regarding inset in 4th Embodiment is performed.

(First embodiment)
The first embodiment of the slot machine, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described below. In the present specification, the directions of up, down, left, right, front (front), and rear (back) refer to the respective directions when viewed by a player playing a game in a slot machine.

FIG. 1 shows a slot machine 10 as a game machine and a sand unit SU that is installed together with the slot machine 10 in an island facility of a game arcade.
The sand unit SU is provided with an insertion/return port SUa for inserting a prepaid card as a storage medium. The sand unit SU is provided with a return button SUb operated when returning the inserted prepaid card. When the return button SUb is operated, the prepaid card is returned from the insertion/return port SUa. The prepaid card stores, for example, a card balance as a value that can be used in a game and the number of acquired medals as an acquired value. Further, the sand unit SU is provided with a lending button SUc operated when lending a medal as a game medium. The sand unit SU is provided with a medal lending outlet SUd from which lent medals are discharged. When the lending button SUc is operated when the value stored in the prepaid card exists, medals are ejected from the medal lending outlet SUd. In the present embodiment, the medals lent out by the sand unit SU correspond to the gaming machine medium based on the value stored in the storage medium. The sand unit SU may be provided with a bill insertion slot for inserting a bill, and the card balance of the prepaid card increases in accordance with the bill inserted from the bill insertion slot.

The slot machine 10 includes a rectangular box-shaped main body cabinet 11. The main body cabinet 11 has an opening (not shown) on the front surface. The slot machine 10 includes an opening/closing door 12 that covers the opening of the main body cabinet 11. The opening/closing door 12 is supported by the main body cabinet 11 so as to be openable and closable.

A reel unit 13 is arranged inside the main body cabinet 11. The reel unit 13 has a first reel 13a (left reel), a second reel 13b (middle reel), and a third reel 13c (right reel). The reels 13a to 13c are arranged side by side, the second reel 13b is arranged on the right side of the first reel 13a, and the third reel 13c is arranged on the right side of the second reel 13b. The reel unit 13 also has an actuator such as a stepping motor. Each of the reels 13a to 13c is configured to be rotatable (rotatable) in the circumferential direction (vertical direction) independently of each other by operating an actuator. The reels 13a to 13c are configured so that they can be stopped independently of each other by stopping the operation of the actuator. The reel unit 13 also has reel sensors SE1 to SE3 (shown in FIG. 9) that detect the rotational positions of the reels 13a to 13c. Specifically, the reel unit 13 includes a first reel sensor SE1 that detects the rotational position of the first reel 13a, a second reel sensor SE2 that detects the rotational position of the second reel 13b, and a rotational position of the third reel 13c. And a third reel sensor SE3 for detecting.

A translucent film having a plurality of patterns (identification information) printed along the longitudinal direction is wound around each reel 13a to 13c. As a result, a plurality of symbols are arranged (arranged) on the reels 13a to 13c along the outer peripheral surface. In this embodiment, 21 symbols are arranged on each reel 13a to 13c. The plurality of symbols include, for example, a replay symbol imitating the character of REPLAY, a bell symbol imitating a bell, a watermelon symbol imitating a watermelon, a cherry symbol imitating a cherry, a bar symbol imitating the character of BAR, an Arabic numeral. There are seven patterns that imitate "7".

Further, in the opening/closing door 12, a performance display device 14 is arranged in front of the reel unit 13 having the reels 13a to 13c. As the effect display device 14 of the present embodiment, a transmissive display (transmissive liquid crystal display) is used. Thus, in this embodiment, the transmissive display is arranged on the front side of the plurality of reels. The effect display device 14 may be, for example, a dot matrix type display device, an organic EL type display device, or the like. The effect display device 14 has a transmissive area 14a as a transmissive portion that allows a part of the symbols of the rotating reels 13a to 13c to be seen through (visible). That is, the slot machine 10 includes the transparent area 14a (transparent portion). In the effect display device 14, the area surrounding the transparent area 14a is a non-transparent area in which some of the symbols on the reels 13a to 13c cannot be seen through (visible). In addition, when it is indicated as “transparent” in the present specification, a state in which the symbols of the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side of the effect display device 14 can be seen through the effect display device 14 It means that.

On each reel 13a to 13c, a stop position of the symbol is set so that the player can see the symbol through the transparent area 14a. Stop positions of a plurality of symbols are set on the reels 13a to 13c. In the slot machine 10, an upper stop position, a middle stop position, and a lower stop position are set for each reel 13a to 13c. The transparent area 14a is formed in a size that allows three continuous symbols in the circumferential direction on each reel 13a to 13c to be seen through. That is, the transmissive area 14a is configured such that the three symbols can be seen through on each of the reels 13a to 13c. In the present embodiment, as the reels 13a to 13c rotate, the symbols are variably displayed so as to loop in the circumferential direction from the upper side to the lower side in the transparent area 14a, and the variable game (game) is performed. Incidentally, in the reels 13a to 13c of the present embodiment, the types of symbols arranged on the reels 13a to 13c and the arrangement order of the symbols are different. In each of the reels 13a to 13c, it is preferable that at least one of the types of symbols and the arrangement order of symbols on some reels is different from the types of symbols and the arrangement of symbols on the other reels. However, the type of symbols and the arrangement order of the symbols on some reels may be the same as the type of symbols and the arrangement order of the symbols on other reels.

In the slot machine 10, the combination of the stop positions selected one by one from the three stop positions set for each of the reels 13a to 13c is a combination of the effective stop positions that can determine the stopped symbol combination as a winning prize. Is set. In the following description, a line connecting a plurality of stop positions forming a combination of effective stop positions is simply referred to as an effective line YL. In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, each middle stage stop position of the reels 13a to 13c constitutes an effective line YL (combination of effective stop positions). The effective line is also called the winning line.

In the following description, when the symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL is a symbol combination that defines an award, it is determined as “winning”. In the slot machine 10, when a symbol combination defining a prize is won, the prize defined in the symbol combination is awarded. In the present specification, the "symbol combination derived in the variable game" corresponds to the symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL in the variable game. The combinations other than the valid stop position combinations are invalid stop position combinations (so-called invalid lines) in which the displayed symbol combination cannot be determined as winning.

The slot machine 10 has a plurality of backlights BL. Specifically, the slot machine 10 includes a backlight BL that illuminates the symbols stopped at the upper stop position, the middle stop position, and the lower stop position on each of the reels 13a to 13c. The backlight BL is arranged inside the translucent film of the reels 13a to 13c, and illuminates each stop position from the inside of the translucent film. That is, in the slot machine 10, the backlight BL is installed behind the reel. By the way, the backlight BL illuminates the stop position of the symbol on the spinning reel when the reels 13a to 13c are spinning. In this way, by illuminating the stop position of the symbol on the rotating reel, the symbol on the rotating reel is visually recognized as compared with the case where the stop position of the symbol on the rotating reel is not illuminated. It becomes easier and the visibility is improved.

The slot machine 10 includes a decorative lamp 15 on the front side of the opening/closing door 12. The decoration lamp 15 executes, as one of the effects, an effect (hereinafter, referred to as a light emission effect) of causing the built-in light emitting body to emit light, blink, and turn off. The slot machine 10 includes a speaker 16 that outputs sound on the front side of the opening/closing door 12. The speaker 16 executes, as one of the effects, an effect (hereinafter, referred to as a sound effect) for outputting a sound such as a human voice, a sound effect, or a music. For example, the sound output from the speaker 16 includes background music (so-called BGM).

The slot machine 10 is provided with a medal insertion slot 17 for inserting medals on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. The slot machine 10 has a medal selector inside the machine. The medal selector includes an insertion sensor SE4 for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 17 (shown in FIG. 9). Further, the slot machine 10 includes a bet button 18 on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. The bet button 18 is means for betting medals (hereinafter referred to as bets) from credits stored internally in the slot machine 10. In the following description, betting a medal may be referred to as “betting”, and the bet number may be referred to as a “bet number”. Further, the slot machine 10 is provided with a settlement button 19 as a settlement operating means on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. The settlement button 19 is a means to be operated when the bet medals and the credits internally stored in the slot machine 10 are settled (when the credits are paid back).

The slot machine 10 includes a start lever 20 as a start operation unit on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. The start lever 20 is means for performing a start operation for starting the rotation of the reels 13a to 13c. That is, acceptance of the start operation serves as an opportunity to start the variable game. Further, the operation of the start lever 20 for starting the rotation (motion) of the reel (starting the fluctuating game) corresponds to the starting operation, and in the slot machine 10, the fluctuating game is started based on the starting operation.

The slot machine 10 includes a left stop button 21a (first stop button) on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. The left stop button 21a corresponds to the left reel 13a and is a means for performing a stop operation for stopping the rotation of the left reel 13a. The slot machine 10 includes a middle stop button 21b (second stop button) on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. The middle stop button 21b corresponds to the middle reel 13b and is a means for performing a stop operation for stopping the rotation of the middle reel 13b. The slot machine 10 includes a right stop button 21c (third stop button) on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. The right stop button 21c corresponds to the right reel 13c and is a means for performing a stop operation for stopping the rotation of the right reel 13c. As described above, the stop buttons 21a to 21c correspond to the respective reels. The stop buttons 21a to 21c each correspond to a stop operation unit. That is, the slot machine 10 has a plurality of stop operation sections. As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured to be able to stop the rotation of the reel when the stop button is operated. Further, the operation of the stop button for stopping the rotating reel corresponds to the stop operation. Then, in the slot machine 10, the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the stop operation.

The slot machine 10 is provided with a medal payout opening 22 at the lower part of the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. The slot machine 10 includes a tray 23 for receiving the medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 22. The slot machine 10 includes a hopper unit HU (shown in FIG. 9) capable of paying out medals from the medal payout outlet 22 inside the machine. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 17 pass through the medal selector and are stored in the hopper unit HU.

In the slot machine 10, a heart movable body 25 corresponding to a specific movable body is provided on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. The heart movable body 25 is operable from the origin 25a to the movable arrival position 25b. When the heart movable body 25 moves to the movable reaching position, it moves to the front side of the effect display device 14. The heart movable body 25 operates by receiving an operation from the first actuator A1 (shown in FIG. 9). Further, the slot machine 10 includes a star movable body 26 on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12. The movable star body 26 is operable from the origin 26a to the movable arrival position 26b. Even if the movable star 26 moves to the movable reaching position, it does not move to the front side of the effect display device 14. The star movable body 26 operates in response to an operation from the second actuator A2 (shown in FIG. 9).

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect button EB that can be operated by the player on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12.
As shown in FIG. 2, the effect button EB includes a selection button SB and a menu button MB. The selection button SB includes an upper button SBa, a right button SBb, a lower button SBc, a left button SBd, and an enter button SBe. The menu button MB is attached to the selection button SB.

The slot machine 10 includes an information panel 30 on the front surface of the opening/closing door 12 that can display predetermined information.
As shown in FIG. 3, the information panel 30 includes a loadable display unit 31. The insertable display unit 31 displays whether or not the medal can be inserted, for example, depending on the lighting state of the light emitter. The information panel 30 includes a replay display section 32. The replay display unit 32 displays whether the game is a replay (replay), for example, depending on the lighting state of the light emitter. The replay game will be described later. The information panel 30 includes a weight display section 33. The weight display unit 33 displays whether the wait time is in progress, for example, depending on the lighting state of the light emitter. The wait time is the shortest game time (shortest game time) set so that the number of times the variable game is executed per unit time does not exceed a predetermined number of times. The information panel 30 includes a status display unit 34. The status display unit 34 displays, for example, an error code so that an error that has occurred in the slot machine 10 can be identified.

The information panel 30 includes a bet display section 35. The bet display unit 35 is composed of three light emitting units. The bet display unit 35 displays the bet number (bet number) according to the lighting state of the three light emitting units. When the bet number is “1”, one of the three light emitting units that configures the bet display unit 35 is turned on and the remaining two light emitting units are turned off. When the number of bets is “2”, two of the three light emitting units that form the bet display unit 35 are turned on and the remaining one light emitting unit is turned off. When the number of bets is “3”, all the light emitting units forming the bet display unit 35 are turned on.

The information panel 30 includes a credit display section 36. The credit display unit 36 is configured to include two 7-segment displays arranged side by side. The credit display unit 36 displays the number of medals stored as credits inside the machine. As described above, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to store the number of medals (game media) as credits.

The information panel 30 includes a payout display unit 37. The payout display unit 37 is configured to include two 7-segment displays arranged side by side. As a result, the payout display unit 37 is configured to include two 7-segment displays arranged side by side. The payout display unit 37 displays information (hereinafter, referred to as payout information) regarding the number of medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of a prize in the variable game. It should be noted that the number of medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of a prize in the variable game is not the number of medals actually paid out from the medal payout outlet 22 but also the number of medals to be added to the credits. It can be said that it is the number of medals awarded when a prize is generated. The payout display unit 37 displays information regarding the operation mode of the stop buttons 21a to 21c (hereinafter referred to as operation information) during execution of the variable game. As described above, the payout display unit 37 that displays the payout information is also used as a display unit that displays (notifies) the operation information. The operation information corresponds to information on the operation mode of the stop operation unit. The pressing order of the stop buttons corresponds to the operation order of the stop operation unit.

As shown in FIG. 4, the operation order of the stop buttons 21a to 21c (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a pressing order) is different when the stop buttons performing the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation are different. There are all six ways from the first to the sixth pressing order. For example, the first pressing order is the pressing order of operating the stop buttons 21a to 21c so that the rotation is stopped in the order of the left reel 13a→the middle reel 13b→the right reel 13c. In FIG. 4, the left stop button 21a is shown as "left", the middle stop button 21b is shown as "middle", and the right stop button 21c is shown as "right" when indicating the pressing order. For example, the first pressing order is shown as "left middle right". FIG. 4 shows a reel whose rotation is stopped by the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation. For example, in the case of the first pressing order, the rotation of the left reel 13a is stopped by the first stop operation, the rotation of the middle reel 13b is stopped by the second stop operation, and the rotation of the right reel 13c is stopped by the third stop operation. It is shown that. The "left center right" that is the first pressing order and the "left center right" that is the second pressing order correspond to the pressing order in which the left stop button 21a is first operated among the stop buttons 21a to 21c. The "middle left and right" that is the third pressing order and the "middle right left" that is the fourth pressing order correspond to the pressing order in which the middle stop button 21b is first operated among the stop buttons 21a to 21c. “Right, middle, left” that is the fifth pressing order and “right, middle, left” that is the sixth pressing order correspond to the pressing order in which the right stop button 21c is first operated among the stop buttons 21a to 21c.

Next, based on FIG. 5, a symbol combination for which a prize is determined will be described. The symbol combination for which the award has been determined is also called a "role".
The symbol combination (role) in which the prize is defined includes a symbol combination (bonus role) in which a bonus is determined as a prize, a symbol combination (payout symbol) in which the payout of medals is determined as a prize, and a symbol combination in which a re-game is determined as an award. There is a (playing game role). Replay is to be able to start the next fluctuating game without having to bet medals.

The bonus game state is defined as a bonus game state (bonus state) as a prize. On the other hand, in the bonus combination, payout of medals and replay are not defined as a prize. In this way, the slot machine 10 is configured to be able to generate a bonus game state as a special state. In the following description, a symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL when a bonus combination is won is referred to as a "bonus stop eye". In the present embodiment, the bonus stop eye corresponds to the special display result. As shown in FIG. 5, the bonus combinations include, for example, a first bonus combination, a second bonus combination, and a single bonus combination. In the following description, of the first bonus combination, the second bonus combination, and the single bonus combination, the first bonus combination and the second bonus combination may be collectively referred to as a specific bonus combination.

A first bonus game state (first bonus state) is determined as a prize for the first bonus combination. In the following description, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL when the first bonus combination is won is referred to as “first bonus stop eye”. In the present embodiment, the first bonus game state ends when the number of medals paid out in the first bonus game state exceeds 236. Thus, the condition for ending the first bonus game state is satisfied when the number of medals paid out in the first bonus game state exceeds 236.

A second bonus game state (second bonus state) is defined as a prize for the second bonus combination. In the following description, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL when the second bonus combination is won is shown as "second bonus stop eye". In the present embodiment, the second bonus game state ends when the number of medals paid out in the second bonus game state exceeds 86. Thus, the condition for ending the second bonus game state is satisfied when the number of medals paid out in the second bonus game state exceeds 86.

A single bonus game state (single bonus state) is defined as a prize for the single bonus combination. In the following description, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL when the single bonus combination is won is shown as "single bonus stop eye". In the present embodiment, the single bonus game state ends when one variable game is played in the single bonus game state. That is, the single bonus game state ends when one game ends in the single bonus game state. In this way, the ending condition of the single bonus game state is satisfied by ending one game in the single bonus game state.

The number of fluctuating games in the first bonus game state and the number of fluctuating games in the second bonus game state are more than one. Thus, the number of games in the single bonus game state is one, while the number of games in the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state is more than one. Therefore, the number of games in the single bonus game state is the smallest among the plurality of types of bonus game states. Then, in the slot machine 10, the number of medals that can be obtained when the first bonus game state is generated, the number of medals that can be obtained when the second bonus game state is generated, and the single bonus game state Is more than the number of medals that can be obtained if Further, in the slot machine 10, the number of medals that can be acquired when the second bonus game state is generated is larger than the number of medals that can be acquired when the single bonus game state is generated. That is, the number of medals that can be obtained when the single bonus game state is generated among the plurality of types of bonus game states is the smallest. In the present embodiment, at least one of the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state corresponds to the first special state, and the single bonus game state corresponds to the second special state. Then, in the present embodiment, at least one of the first bonus stop eye and the second bonus stop eye corresponds to the first special display result, and the single bonus stop eye corresponds to the second special display result. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus game state corresponds to an advantageous state.

A payout of a medal is defined as a prize for the payout combination. As shown in FIG. 5, the payout combination includes, for example, a cherry combination, a watermelon combination, a bell combination, and a single combination combination.
A predetermined number (in the present embodiment, “2”) of medals are paid out to the winning combination as a prize. In the following description, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL when the winning combination of the cherry is won is indicated as "cherry stop eye". For the watermelon role, a predetermined number (“3” in the present embodiment) of medals are paid out as a prize. In the following description, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL when the watermelon winning combination is won is referred to as "watermelon stop eye". A predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of medals are paid out as a prize for the bell role. In the following description, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL when the winning combination of the bell is won is shown as "bell stop eye". A payout of a predetermined number of medals (“1” in the present embodiment) is determined for one winning combination. In the following description, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL when one winning combination is won is referred to as "bell spill stop eye". In the present embodiment, the number of medals to be paid out is not the number of medals actually paid out from the medal payout outlet 22 but includes the number of medals added as credits, and the medals given to the player. Equivalent to the number of sheets.

A replay game is defined as a prize in the replay role. The replay role is also called a replay role. In the following description, a symbol combination that is stopped on the activated line YL when the replay combination wins is indicated as "replay stop eye". As shown in FIG. 5, the re-game combination includes, for example, a normal re-game combination and an promoted re-game combination. In the following description, the symbol combination that is stopped on the activated line YL when the normal replay combination is won is shown as "normal replay stop eye". Further, the symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL when the promotion re-play combination wins is shown as "promotion re-play stop eye".

The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to control the gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 6, the gaming states in the slot machine 10 include a first gaming state, a second gaming state, a carryover gaming state, a first bonus gaming state, a second bonus gaming state and a single bonus gaming state.

In the slot machine 10, in the variable game in which the winning of the first bonus role is allowed in the role lottery, if the first bonus role is not won, the winning of the first bonus role is allowed (the first bonus role Winning) is carried over. In the present embodiment, after the winning of the first bonus combination is allowed in the winning combination lottery, the winning of the first bonus combination is continuously allowed until the winning of the first bonus combination. In the slot machine 10, after the winning of the first bonus combination is permitted in the combination lottery, the winning of the first bonus combination is continuously permitted from the next variable game. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, when the second bonus combination is not won in the variable game in which the winning of the second bonus combination is allowed in the combination lottery, the winning of the second bonus combination is allowed (second The winning of the bonus role) is carried over. In the present embodiment, after the winning of the second bonus combination is allowed in the combination lottery, the winning of the second bonus combination is continuously allowed until the second bonus combination is won. In the slot machine 10, after the winning of the second bonus combination is permitted in the combination lottery, the winning of the second bonus combination is continuously permitted from the next variable game. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, if the single bonus combination does not win in the variable game in which the winning of the single bonus combination is allowed among the bonus combinations, it is possible to allow the winning of the single bonus combination (winning of the single bonus combination). Not carried over.

In the slot machine 10, when the first bonus winning combination is not won in the variable game in which the winning of the first bonus winning combination is allowed, that is, when the winning of the first bonus winning combination is carried over, the carryover game state is entered. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, when the second bonus combination is not won in the variable game in which the winning of the second bonus combination is allowed, that is, when the winning of the second bonus combination is carried over, the carry-over game state is entered. Transition. In this way, in the slot machine 10, when the winning of the specific bonus combination is carried over, the state is shifted to the carryover game state.

In the slot machine 10, the second gaming state is a gaming state in which winning of a re-gaming combination is more easily permitted than in the first gaming state. Therefore, in the second gaming state, the consumption of medals is suppressed as compared with the first gaming state. Therefore, it can be said that the second gaming state is more advantageous than the first gaming state. The second game state is a so-called "replay time (RT)". Then, in the slot machine 10, when the promoted re-game combination is won in the first game state, the game machine shifts to the second game state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when one winning combination is won in the second gaming state, the game machine shifts to the first gaming state.

In the slot machine 10, when the first bonus combination is won, the first bonus game state is entered. In the slot machine 10, the first bonus game state is created by shifting to the first bonus game state. Then, in the slot machine 10, when the ending condition of the first bonus game state is satisfied in the first bonus game state, the game machine shifts to the first game state. In addition, in the slot machine 10, when the second bonus combination is won, the state shifts to the second bonus game state. In the slot machine 10, the second bonus game state is generated by shifting to the second bonus game state. Then, in the slot machine 10, when the ending condition of the second bonus game state is satisfied in the second bonus game state, the game machine shifts to the first game state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the single bonus combination is won, the state is shifted to the single bonus game state. In the slot machine 10, the single bonus game state is created by shifting to the single bonus game state. Then, in the slot machine 10, when the ending condition of the single bonus game state is satisfied in the single bonus game state, the game machine shifts to the first game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special state is generated after the special display result is derived.

In the slot machine 10, the bonus gaming state has a higher winning probability of the payout combination in the winning combination lottery than the gaming states other than the bonus gaming state. The winning probability of the payout combination is the probability that the winning of the payout combination is allowed. In this way, in the bonus game state, the frequency of winning medals is improved as compared with the game states other than the bonus game state. Therefore, it can be said that the bonus game state is more advantageous than the game states other than the bonus game state.

It should be noted that allowing the winning of the bonus role in the role lottery is also referred to as winning the bonus role. In addition, it is said that the winning of the bonus role is carried forward if the winning of the bonus role is continuously allowed. The carryover game state is also referred to as "inside". On the other hand, the first game state and the second game state are also called "non-internal". In addition, in a game state other than the bonus game state, when the carry-over game state in which the winning of the bonus role is continuously allowed is set to the carry-over state, the first gaming state and the second game state in which the winning of the bonus role is not continuously allowed are not carried over. It can be said to be a state. Incidentally, the bonus game state is also referred to as "during bonus character", and the gaming states other than the bonus game state are also referred to as "during non bonus character".

The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to control the effect state as an effect mode. There are multiple types of effect states. In each effect state, effect state identification information capable of identifying the effect state during the stay (effect state being controlled) is notified. In the slot machine 10, for example, a different background image for each type of effect state is displayed on the effect display device 14, the decoration lamp 15 is caused to emit light with a different emission color for each type of effect state, or for each type of effect state. Different music (for example, background music) is output to the speaker 16 to notify the production state identification information. Therefore, the player can recognize the production state during the stay from the background image displayed on the production display device 14, the emission color of the decoration lamp 15, the music output from the speaker 16, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect states in the slot machine 10 include a normal effect state, a preparation effect state, an advantageous effect state, and a bonus effect state. The advantageous effect states in the slot machine 10 include a first advantageous effect state, a second advantageous effect state, and a special advantageous effect state. The bonus effect states in the slot machine 10 include a first bonus effect state and a second bonus effect state.

The normal effect state and the preparation effect state are mainly effect states in which the player stays in the first game state. The first advantageous effect state, the second advantageous effect state, and the special advantageous effect state are mainly effect states to stay when in the second game state. The first bonus effect state is an effect state in which the player stays mainly in the first bonus game state. The second bonus effect state is an effect state in which the player stays mainly in the second bonus game state.

In the slot machine 10, for example, a navigation effect (operation related effect) that notifies an operation mode (operation timing or operation order) of a stop button for stopping a symbol combination for which a prize is set on the activated line YL is executed. .. The navigation effect is also called an operation navigation effect (operation navigation) or a push order navigation effect (push order navigation). Then, in the slot machine 10, in the advantageous effect state, as compared with in the normal effect state, the navigation effect with a content advantageous for the player is higher. Therefore, the advantageous effect state is a so-called “assist time (AT)”.

In particular, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the winning of the bell role is allowed in the advantageous effect state, the navigation effect of notifying the pushing order for winning the bell role is executed, while When the winning of the Bell role is allowed in the production state, the navigation effect for informing the pushing order for winning the Bell role is not executed. In the present embodiment, the pushing order for winning the bell role corresponds to an operation for obtaining a profit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the navigation effect informing the pushing order for winning the bell role is equivalent to the guidance effect for guiding the operation in which the profit can be obtained. Then, in the present embodiment, the advantageous effect state in which the navigation effect that notifies the push order for winning the bell role is executed corresponds to the specific state in which the guide effect that guides the operation for obtaining a profit is executed. .. In this way, the slot machine of the present embodiment is configured to be able to generate a specific state.

As shown in FIG. 7, in the slot machine 10, when the advantageous condition is established in the normal effect state, the state is shifted to the ready effect state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the advantageous start condition is satisfied in the preparatory effect state, the advantageous effect state is entered. At this time, even in the advantageous effect state, the state shifts to the first advantageous effect state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the advantageous ending condition is satisfied in the advantageous effect state, the state shifts to the normal effect state.

In the slot machine 10, when the advantageous promotion condition is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state, the state shifts to the second advantageous effect state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the advantageous demotion condition is established in the second advantageous effect state, the state is shifted to the first advantageous effect state. When the special advantageous condition is established in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, the special advantageous effect state is entered. In the present embodiment, the advantageous effect state corresponds to the advantageous state. That is, the advantageous state in the present embodiment includes a bonus game state and an advantageous effect state.

In the slot machine 10, when a specific bonus combination is won, the state shifts to the bonus effect state. Specifically, in the slot machine 10, when the first bonus combination is won, the state shifts to the first bonus effect state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the second bonus combination is won, the state shifts to the second bonus effect state.

In the slot machine 10, when the specific bonus ending condition is satisfied in the bonus effect state, the effect state is shifted to the effect state different from the bonus effect state. Specifically, in the slot machine 10, when the ending condition of the first bonus game state is satisfied in the first bonus effect state, the effect state before the change to the first bonus effect state is entered. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, when the ending condition of the second bonus game state is satisfied in the second bonus effect state, the effect state before the change to the second bonus effect state is shifted. For example, when the first bonus winning combination is won and the first bonus effect state is entered in the second advantageous effect state, the second advantageous effect state is entered after the first bonus effect state is finished. Further, when the second bonus combination is won and the state shifts to the second bonus effect state in the normal effect state, the state shifts to the normal effect state after the end of the second bonus effect state. Incidentally, in the slot machine 10, the effect state does not shift even if a single bonus combination is won. For example, in the slot machine 10, even if a single bonus combination is won in the normal effect state, the slot machine 10 stays in the normal effect state. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, even if a single bonus combination is won in the advantageous effect state, the slot machine 10 stays in the advantageous effect state.

Further, in the slot machine 10, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, the slot machine 10 shifts to the normal effect state. The advantageous period includes a bonus effect state (bonus game state) and an advantageous effect state. That is, the advantageous period in the present embodiment includes the special state and the specific state. The advantageous period refers to a period in which the advantageous effect state and the bonus effect state are continuously controlled without being controlled to the normal effect state and the preparation effect state. The condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied when the advantage upper limit value stored internally reaches 0. In the slot machine 10, when the advantageous upper limit value reaches 0 in the advantageous effect state and the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, the state shifts to the normal effect state. In addition, when the advantageous upper limit value reaches 0 due to being controlled to the first bonus effect state, that is, when the first bonus game state is generated, it is controlled to the normal effect state after the end of the first bonus effect state. .. At this time, even if the effect state before the transition to the first bonus effect state is the advantageous effect state, if the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus game state, the first bonus effect state After the end of, shifts to the normal production state. Similarly, when the advantageous upper limit value reaches 0 by being controlled to the second bonus effect state, that is, when the second bonus game state is generated, it is controlled to the normal effect state after the end of the second bonus effect state. It At this time, even if the effect state before the transition to the second bonus effect state is the advantageous effect state, if the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the second bonus game state, the second bonus effect state After the end of, shifts to the normal production state.

In the present embodiment, the effect state controlled after the bonus effect state ends corresponds to the special effect mode. In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect states controlled after the bonus effect state is finished include a normal effect state, a preparation effect state, and an advantageous effect state, which correspond to the special effect mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect state controlled after the end of the advantageous effect state corresponds to the specific effect mode. In the present specification, "end of the advantageous effect state" excludes the case where the bonus game state is controlled in the advantageous effect state to be generated in the advantageous effect state, and is changed from the advantageous effect state to the normal effect state. It means the case of transition. Therefore, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect state controlled after the end of the advantageous effect state is the normal effect state, and the normal effect state corresponds to the specific effect mode.

The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to control an internal mode as an internal control state. The internal mode is also called an internal lottery state. There are multiple types of internal modes. Specifically, the internal mode includes a first internal mode, a second internal mode, and a third internal mode.

In the slot machine 10, the maximum number of variable games (hereinafter, referred to as the number of ceilings) is determined until the advantageous condition is satisfied after the advantageous effect state is finished. The number of ceilings corresponds to the upper limit of the number of games required until the next advantageous effect state is generated.

Similarly, in the slot machine 10, the number of ceilings is determined after the end of the first bonus effect state (first bonus game state) or the second bonus effect state (second bonus game state). Then, in the slot machine 10, the number of ceilings is determined at a rate according to the internal mode. In the slot machine 10, the range of the number of ceilings is determined according to the internal mode, and then the number of ceilings is determined from the range of the number of ceilings with equal probability or substantially equal probability. ..

As shown in FIG. 8A, in the third internal mode, the maximum number of times that can be determined as the ceiling number is 128, whereas in the first internal mode or the second internal mode, the ceiling number is The maximum number of times that can be determined is 999. Therefore, in the third internal mode, the advantageous permissible condition is satisfied if the variable game is executed up to 128 times after the end of the advantageous effect state or the bonus effect state. Therefore, it can be said that the third internal mode is an advantageous internal mode as compared with the first internal mode and the second internal mode. Furthermore, in the second internal mode, a smaller number of ceilings is likely to be determined than in the first internal mode. Therefore, it can be said that the second internal mode is more advantageous than the first internal mode.

In the slot machine 10, after the end of the advantageous effect state, the internal mode is drawn. Specifically, in the slot machine 10, the transfer destination internal mode is determined at a rate according to the current internal mode. The current internal mode corresponds to the internal mode before the transition, and the internal mode after the transition corresponds to the internal mode after the transition.

As shown in FIG. 8B, in the second internal mode, the third internal mode is more easily determined as the destination internal mode than in the first internal mode. Furthermore, when the second internal mode is set, the first internal mode is not determined as the destination internal mode. As described above, when the second internal mode is set, the internal mode having a high advantage is more easily determined as the destination internal mode than when the first internal mode is set. From this point of view, it can be said that the second internal mode is more advantageous than the first internal mode. Incidentally, in the third internal mode, the second internal mode is not determined as the destination internal mode, the third internal mode is determined as the destination internal mode, and the third internal mode is continued, or The first internal mode is determined as the destination internal mode, and it is determined to demote to the first internal mode.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, the third internal mode has a higher degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous effect state than the first internal mode or the second internal mode. Further, in the slot machine 10, the second internal mode has a higher degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous effect state than the first internal mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the second internal control state has a higher degree of advantage with respect to the occurrence of the advantageous state than the first internal control state. In the present embodiment, when the third internal mode is set to the second internal control state, at least one of the first internal mode and the second internal mode corresponds to the first internal control state, and the second internal mode is set to the second internal mode. When the control state is set, the first internal mode corresponds to the first internal control state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 9, the slot machine 10 includes a main board 40 as a main controller inside the machine. The main board 40 outputs a control signal (control command) according to the processing result. The slot machine 10 has a sub-board 41 as a sub-control unit inside the machine. The sub-board 41 performs a predetermined process based on the control information output by the main board 40. For example, the sub-board 41 performs a process for executing a display effect by the effect display device 14, a light emission effect by the decoration lamp 15, and a sound effect by the speaker 16. The main board 40 is connected to the sub-board 41. The main board 40 and the sub-board 41 are connected so that control information can be output in one direction from the main board 40 to the sub-board 41.

First, the main substrate 40 will be described in detail.
The main board 40 includes a main control CPU 40a, a main control ROM 40b, and a main control RAM 40c. The main control CPU 40a executes various processes by executing the main control program. The main control ROM 40b stores a main control program, a lottery table used for a predetermined lottery, a judgment value, and the like.

The main control RAM 40c is configured so as to be able to store various information that is appropriately rewritten during the operation of the slot machine 10. The information stored in the main control RAM 40c includes, for example, a flag, a counter, a timer, and the like. The information stored in the main control RAM 40c includes information regarding credits. The main board 40 is configured to be able to generate random numbers. For example, the random number may be generated as a hardware random number by mounting a random number generation circuit that updates the value of the random number in a predetermined cycle on the main board 40, and the main control CPU 40a generates the random number in a predetermined control cycle. It may be generated as a software random number by updating the value of.

The main board 40 is connected to the reel sensors SE1 to SE3 and the closing sensor SE4. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to input the detection signals output from the various sensors SE1 to SE4 via the port. The main board 40 is connected to the actuators of the reels 13a to 13c. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to control the operation of each actuator of the reels 13a to 13c via a drive circuit.

The main board 40 is connected to the bet button 18, the settlement button 19, the start lever 20, and the stop buttons 21a to 21c. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to input the detection signals output from the bet button 18, the settlement button 19, the start lever 20, and the stop buttons 21a to 21c via the port. The main board 40 is connected to the information panel 30. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to control the display content of the information panel 30 via a drive circuit.

The main board 40 is connected to the set value switch 45. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to input an operation signal output when the set value switch 45 is operated, via a port. The set value switch 45 is configured to be operable by using a predetermined key. In the following description, the phrase "the set value switch 45 is operated" means that the set value switch 45 is operated using a predetermined key. The set value switch 45 is provided on the rear side (back side) of the opening/closing door 12.

The set value can be set by operating the set value switch 45 with the start of the power supply to the slot machine 10. The set value is configured in a plurality of stages, and any set value can be set. That is, the slot machine 10 can change the set value by operating the set value switch 45. There are “1”, “2”, and “3” in the set values in the present embodiment, and any one of “1” to “3” can be set as the set value. In the present embodiment, the operation of operating the set value switch 45 to change the set value with the start of power supply corresponds to the setting change operation.

In the slot machine 10, a winning combination lottery is performed with a winning probability based on a set value. Then, in the slot machine 10, the degree of advantage differs depending on the set value, and the machine allocation differs. In the slot machine 10, the winning probability of the bonus winning combination, that is, the probability of winning the bonus winning combination in the winning combination lottery differs depending on the set value. In the present embodiment, allowing the winning of the bonus combination in the role lottery corresponds to the special result of the lottery result. In the present embodiment, the probability that the winning of the bonus combination is allowed in the role lottery corresponds to the probability that the lottery result of the role lottery will be a special result. In the following description, the probability that the winning of the bonus combination is allowed in the combination lottery may be referred to as the “probability of winning the bonus combination”. Then, the probability that the winning of the first bonus role is allowed in the role lottery is the "probability of winning the first bonus role", and the probability that the winning of the second bonus role is allowed in the role lottery is the "probability of winning the second bonus role". In some cases, the probability of winning a single bonus combination in the combination lottery is sometimes referred to as “single bonus combination winning probability”.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the slot machine 10, in the winning combination lottery when the setting value is "1", the winning probability of the first bonus winning combination is "1/240", and the winning probability of the second bonus winning combination is "1". /320", and the winning probability of the single bonus combination is "1/100". Further, in the slot machine 10, in the winning combination lottery when the setting value is “2”, the winning probability of the first bonus winning combination is “1/230”, the winning probability of the second bonus winning combination is “1/300”, and the single winning combination. The winning probability of the bonus role is "1/100". In the slot machine 10, when the set value is “3”, the winning probability of the first bonus combination is “1/200”, the winning probability of the second bonus combination is “1/300”, and the single winning combination is single. The winning probability of the bonus role is "1/100". As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the set value is “1”, the probability of winning the bonus hand in the role lottery is the bonus in the role lottery when the set value is “2” or “3”. Lower than the probability of winning a role. Further, in the slot machine 10, the probability of winning the bonus role in the role lottery when the setting value is “2” is greater than the probability of winning the bonus role in the role lottery when the setting value is “3”. Is also low. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the set value is the first set value, the lottery result of the hand lottery is a special result. When the set value is the second set value, the lottery result of the hand lottery is Lower than the probability of a special result. In the present embodiment, at least one of “2” and “3” corresponds to the second set value when the first set value is “1”, and “2” when the first set value is “2”. 3” corresponds to the second set value.

Here, of the lottery table stored in the main control ROM 40b, a winning lottery table used for internal lottery for determining a winning number from a plurality of winning numbers and the winning number will be described. Hereinafter, the internal lottery for determining the winning number will be referred to as a role lottery. The winning number determined in the role lottery is also called a condition device combination. Therefore, the role lottery can be said to be a “condition device combination lottery”. In the following description, “determining a predetermined winning number in a winning combination lottery” may be expressed as “winning a predetermined winning number in a winning combination lottery”.

The winning number is control information in which one or a plurality of symbol combinations are defined as symbol combinations that can be derived (displayed) on the activated line YL. That is, the winning number is a condition device identifier in which one or more winning combinations are defined as winning combinations in the variable game. The winning numbers in the present embodiment include, for example, a winning number in which a bonus winning combination is permitted, a winning number in which a cherry winning combination is permitted, a winning number in which a watermelon winning combination is permitted, and a bell winning combination is permitted. The winning number to be played and the winning number to which the winning of the re-gaming combination is allowed are included.

In the present embodiment, the winning numbers in which the winning of the bonus combination is permitted are the winning numbers in which the winning of the first bonus winning is permitted, the winning numbers in which the winning of the second bonus winning is permitted, and the winning numbers of the single bonus winnings. There is a winning number that allows winning.

In the present embodiment, winning the winning number in which the winning of the bonus combination is allowed corresponds to winning the bonus combination in the combination lottery, and the lottery result of the combination lottery corresponds to the special result. The "probability of winning the bonus combination" in the role lottery corresponds to the probability of winning the winning number in which the winning of the bonus role is allowed in the role lottery. In addition, winning the winning number in which the winning of the first bonus winning combination is allowed corresponds to winning the first bonus winning combination in the winning combination lottery. The "probability of winning the first bonus combination" in the above-mentioned winning combination lottery corresponds to the probability of winning a winning number in which the winning of the first bonus winning combination is allowed in the winning combination lottery. Similarly, winning the winning number that allows the winning of the second bonus combination is the second prize in the winning combination lottery.
It is equivalent to winning the bonus role. The "probability of winning the second bonus combination" in the above-described winning combination lottery corresponds to the probability of winning a winning number in which winning of the second bonus winning combination is allowed in the winning combination lottery. In addition, winning the winning number in which the winning of the single bonus combination is allowed is equivalent to winning the single bonus combination in the combination lottery. The "probability of winning a single bonus combination" in the above-mentioned winning combination lottery corresponds to the probability of winning a winning number in which winning of a single bonus winning combination is allowed in the winning combination lottery.

In addition, the winning number in which the winning of the bonus combination is allowed does not have to be the winning number in which only the winning combination of the plurality of winning combinations is allowed. For example, the winning combination of the cherry winning combination and the first bonus winning combination is allowed. The winning number may be a winning number or a winning number that allows winning of the re-gaming combination and the second bonus combination. In the slot machine 10, when the winning of the bonus combination is allowed, if the winning of the other payout combination or the re-gaming combination is allowed, the winning of the other payout combination or the re-gaming combination is prioritized, and the bonus combination. Prizes will be carried over to the floating games that follow.

In the present embodiment, the winning number in which the winning of the bell role is allowed is the winning number in which the winning of the bell role alone is allowed, and the winning number in which the winning of the single role is allowed in addition to the bell role. is there. The winning numbers that allow winning the Bell role and the Single hand are, for the winning order of the Stop button to push the Bell hand (push order) and the operation order of the Stop buttons to win the Single hand (press Order), and different winning numbers are included. For example, in the winning numbers that allow winning of the winning combination of the bell combination and the one-piece combination, the bell combination is won when the stop button is operated in a predetermined operation sequence, while the operation order is different from the predetermined operation sequence. If the stop button is operated, there is a winning number for which one hand will win.

In the present embodiment, the winning numbers in which the re-playing combination is allowed to win are the winning numbers in which only the normal re-playing combination is allowed, and the winning numbers in which the normal re-playing role and the promoted re-playing combination are allowed to be won. There is a number. For the winning numbers that are allowed to win the normal re-gaming role and the promoted re-gaming role, the operation sequence (press order) of the stop button for winning the normal re-gaming role and the operation for winning the promoted re-gaming role The winning numbers are different from the order (push order). For example, if the stop button is operated in a predetermined operation sequence, the normal re-game combination will be won in the winning numbers for which the winning of the normal re-game combination and the promotion Has a winning number in which the promoted re-game player wins when the stop button is operated in a different operation order.

In the following description, the case of winning the winning number in which the winning of the first bonus combination is permitted in the winning combination lottery is referred to as “the case of winning the winning of the first bonus combination”. In addition, the case where the winning number that allows the winning of the second bonus combination is won in the winning combination lottery is shown as "the case where the winning of the second bonus winning is allowed". In addition, the case where the winning number that allows the winning of the single bonus combination is won in the combination lottery is shown as "the case where the winning of the single bonus combination is allowed". In addition, the case where the winning number that allows the winning of the cherry role is won in the winning lottery is shown as "the case where the winning of the cherry role is allowed". In addition, the case where the winning number that allows the winning of the watermelon part is won in the part lottery is indicated as "the case where the winning of the watermelon part is allowed". Similarly, the case where the winning number for which the winning of the Bell role is permitted is won in the winning combination lottery is indicated as "the case where the winning of the Bell role is permitted". In addition, the case where the winning number of the re-gaming combination is allowed in the role lottery is shown as "the case where the winning of the re-gaming combination is allowed". In addition, the case where the winning numbers of the normal re-gaming role and the promoted re-gaming role are accepted in the role lottery are indicated as "the case where the winning of the promoted re-gaming role is allowed".

There are a plurality of types of role lottery tables in the slot machine 10. In the slot machine 10, a winning combination lottery table corresponding to the gaming state is used in winning combination lottery. The role lottery table in the present embodiment includes a first role lottery table used in the role lottery in the first gaming state, a second role lottery table used in the role lottery in the second gaming state, and a role lottery in the carryover gaming state. There is a third role lottery table used in. Further, in the role lottery table in the present embodiment, a fourth role lottery table used in the role lottery in the first bonus game state, a fifth role lottery table used in the role lottery in the second bonus game state, and a single bonus. There is a sixth role lottery table used in the role lottery in the gaming state. The slot machine 10 includes a first winning lottery table to a sixth winning lottery table for each set value. It should be noted that, for example, of the first role lottery table to the sixth role lottery table, the first role lottery table to the third role lottery table used in the role lottery in game states other than the bonus game state are provided for each set value. The fourth to sixth role lottery tables used in the role lottery in the bonus game state may not be provided for each set value. Further, the role lottery table used in the role lottery in some or all of the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state and the single bonus game state may be shared. For example, the fourth combination lottery table may be used in the combination lottery in the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state.

In the role lottery table, the value of the random number used for the role lottery (hereinafter referred to as the role lottery random number) is a numerical value within the range that can be taken as the value of the role lottery random number for the winning numbers that can be determined. It is distributed by a predetermined number from among.

In the fourth part lottery table to the sixth part lottery table, the probability of summing the determination rates of the winning numbers that are allowed to win the bell part is higher than in the first part lottery table to the third part lottery table. , The value of the random number for the role lottery is distributed. As a result, in the bonus game state, compared to the game states other than the bonus game state, it is easier to allow the winning of the bell combination. By the way, in the present embodiment, in the fourth part lottery table to the sixth part lottery table, it is possible to win only the winning numbers in which the winning of the bell role alone is allowed even among the winning numbers in which the winning of the bell role is allowed. The value of the random number for the role lottery is assigned to.

In the slot machine 10, if no winning number is won in the winning combination lottery, that is, if the winning of the winning combination is not permitted, the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is “out of sync”. Then, when the lottery result of the winning lottery is out of proportion, the symbol combination in which the prize is set based on the lottery result of the winning lottery is not derived. However, when the winning of the specific bonus combination is carried over and the lottery result of the combination lottery is out of alignment, the carried over specific bonus combination can be won.

In the slot machine 10, if the lottery result of the role lottery is missed when the winning of the first bonus hand is carried over, the stop buttons 21a to 21c are pushed at stop operation positions where the first bonus stop can be derived. When operated, the reels 13a to 13c are stopped so that the first bonus stop eye is derived. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, when the lottery result of the role lottery is out of alignment when the winning of the first bonus hand is carried over, the stop operation position other than the stop operation position where the first bonus stop eye can be derived. When the stop buttons 21a to 21c are operated with, the reels 13a to 13c are stopped so that a missed stop eye for which an award is not determined is derived. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, if the lottery result of the role lottery is missed when the winning of the second bonus hand is carried over, the stop button 21a is brought to the stop operation position where the second bonus stop eye can be derived. 21c are operated, the reels 13a to 13c are stopped so that the second bonus stop eye is derived. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, when the lottery result of the combination lottery is out of alignment when the winning of the second bonus hand is carried over, the stop operation position other than the stop operation position where the second bonus stop eye can be derived. When the stop buttons 21a to 21c are operated with, the reels 13a to 13c are stopped so that a missed stop eye for which an award is not determined is derived.

Next, the sub-board 41 will be described in detail.
As shown in FIG. 9, the sub-board 41 includes a sub-control CPU 41a, a sub-control ROM 41b, and a sub-control RAM 41c. For example, the sub-control CPU 41a executes various processes (for example, processes related to effects) by executing the sub-control program. The sub-control ROM 41b stores a sub-control program, a lottery table used for lottery, a determination value, and the like. The sub-control ROM 41b stores display effect data relating to the display effect on the effect display device 14. The sub-control ROM 41b stores light emission effect data regarding the light emission effect on the decoration lamp 15. The sub-control ROM 41b stores sound effect data regarding sound effects in the speaker 16.

The sub-control RAM 41c is configured to be able to store various information that is appropriately rewritten during the operation of the slot machine 10. The information stored in the sub control RAM 41c includes, for example, a flag, a counter, and a timer. The sub-board 41 is configured to be able to generate random numbers. For example, the random number may be generated as a hardware random number by mounting a random number generation circuit that updates the value of the random number in the predetermined cycle on the sub-board 41, and the sub-control CPU 41a generates the random number in the predetermined control cycle. It may be generated as a software random number by updating the value of.

The sub-board 41 is connected to the effect display device 14, the decoration lamp 15, and the speaker 16. The sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the effect display device 14, the decoration lamp 15, and the speaker 16 via a drive circuit.

The sub board 41 is connected to the selection button SB and the menu button MB. The sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be able to input the detection signals output from the selection button SB and the menu button MB via the port. The sub-board 41 is also connected to the volume adjuster 47. The sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be able to input a signal indicating the maximum volume set by the operation of the volume adjuster 47 via the port. The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the maximum volume of the sound output from the speaker 16 can be set within a predetermined range by operating the volume adjuster 47. The volume controller 47 is arranged on the back side of the opening/closing door 12.

The sub-board 41 is connected to the backlight BL. The sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the backlight BL via a drive circuit. Further, the sub-board 41 is connected to the first actuator A1, and the sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the operation of the first actuator A1 via a drive circuit. In this embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the operation of the first actuator A1 to control the operation of the heart movable body 25 corresponding to the specific movable body, thereby controlling the operation of the specific movable body. The function as a means is realized. Further, the sub-board 41 is connected to the second actuator A2, and the sub-control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the operation of the second actuator A2 via a drive circuit.

A volume flag is stored in the sub-control RAM 41c. The volume flag is set to a value capable of specifying the reference volume as a reference. The reference volume may be, for example, a maximum volume or a minimum volume that can be output from the speaker 16, or a range of volume that can be output from the speaker 16. Further, the reference volume may be a multiplication factor that amplifies the volume that is the basis for executing the sound effect. In the present embodiment, the volume flag is set to a value capable of specifying the volume within the maximum volume set by the volume adjuster 47. The volume flags in the present embodiment include a first volume flag corresponding to a sound effect and a character voice, and a second volume flag corresponding to background music. When the volume adjuster 47 is operated, the first volume flag and the second volume flag are set to values that can specify the volume within the range of the maximum volume set by the operation of the volume adjuster 47. ..

Next, a process executed by the main control CPU 40a of the main board 40 will be described.
When the set value switch 45 is operated along with the start of the power supply to the slot machine 10, the main control CPU 40a can identify the set value set by the operation of the set value switch 45 (hereinafter, set value. (Shown as information) is stored in the main control RAM 40c. Further, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a set value command) capable of specifying the set set value in the output buffer. The control information (command) stored in the output buffer is output to the sub-board 41 in the interrupt processing after the next time. In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs the process of storing the set value information in the main control RAM 40c based on the operation of operating the set value switch 45 with the start of power supply to change the set value. The function as the set value means is realized.

The process performed by the main control CPU 40a includes a game progress main process.
As shown in FIG. 11, in the game progress main process, the main control CPU 40a performs a game start set process (step S101). In the game start set processing, the main control CPU 40a stores information about the game state of the slot machine 10 and erases or updates the upper part of a predetermined storage area in the main control RAM 40c. Next, the main control CPU 40a starts accepting bets for medals (step S102). Next, the main control CPU 40a checks the game state (step S103).

Next, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the re-game operation is in progress (step S104). The re-game operation time corresponds to when the re-game is given. When it is not during the re-game operation (step S104: NO), the main control CPU 40a performs a medal management process for setting the bet number in the present variation game (step S105). When the bet number is set in step S105, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a bet number setting command) capable of specifying that the bet number has been set in the output buffer. The bet number setting command of the present embodiment can also specify the set bet number. In step S105, when the main control CPU 40a receives the detection signal from the bet button 18, the main control CPU 40a adds the bet number so that the bet number stored in the main control RAM 40c becomes the specified bet number X, and the addition amount is added. Only, the credit stored in the main control RAM 40c is subtracted. Further, in step S105, the main control CPU 40a increases the bet number by 1 when the detection signal from the insertion sensor SE4 is input. At this time, when the bet number has reached the specified bet number X, the main control CPU 40a adds 1 to the credit stored in the main control RAM 40c to update the credit. Further, at this time, when the credits have reached the credit upper limit number, the main control CPU 40a drives the hopper unit HU and pays out one medal.

The main control CPU 40a determines that the bet number in the current variable game is the specified bet number at which the variable game can be started when the re-game is in operation (step S104: YES) or when the process of step S105 is completed. It is determined whether or not it matches X (step S106). Note that the main control CPU 40a resets the bet number in the previous fluctuating game to the main control RAM 40c as the bet number in the present fluctuating game when the re-game operation is in progress (step S104: YES). Incidentally, even if the bet number is set, the information for identifying whether the re-game operation is in progress is stored in the main control RAM 40c. Therefore, by referring to the information, the main control CPU 40a Can specify whether the re-game is in operation.

In the present embodiment, the prescribed bet amount X can also be said to be the bet number required for playing one variable game. In the slot machine 10, the prescribed bet amount X is not different between the bonus game state and the game states other than the bonus game state, and is the same. However, the prescribed bet amount X may be different between the bonus gaming state and the gaming state other than the bonus gaming state. In this case, the bonus game state can be said to be a game state in which the prescribed bet number X is different from the game states other than the bonus game state. Further, the bonus game state can be said to be a game state in which the prescribed bet number X is small as compared with the game states other than the bonus game state. The bonus gaming state may be a gaming state in which the prescribed bet number X is larger than in gaming states other than the bonus gaming state. In this way, when the prescribed bet number X is changed according to the gaming state, the main control CPU 40a uses the prescribed bet number X according to the gaming state to perform the process of step S106.

When the bet number does not match the prescribed bet number X (step S106: NO), the main control CPU 40a proceeds to the process of step S103. That is, in the process of step S106, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the variable game can be started. On the other hand, when the bet number in the present variation game matches the specified bet number X (step S106: YES), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the start operation by the start lever 20 has been accepted (step S107). In the process of step S107, the main control CPU 40a makes a positive determination when an operation signal is input from the start lever 20, and makes a negative determination when no operation signal is input from the start lever 20. When the start operation has not been received (step S107: NO), the main control CPU 40a proceeds to the process of step S103. On the other hand, when the start operation is accepted (step S107: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs the game number subtraction process (step S108). When the start operation is accepted, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter, referred to as a variable game start command) capable of specifying the start of the variable game in the output buffer.

In the game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a performs a first game number subtraction process and a second game number subtraction process. In the game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a performs the first game number subtraction process, and then executes the second game number subtraction process after the first game number subtraction process is completed. Then, in the game subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a returns to the game progress main process after ending the second game number subtraction process.

In the first game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag stored in the main control RAM 40c to determine whether the current effect state is the advantageous effect state. When it is not in the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the first game number subtraction process. On the other hand, in the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a subtracts 1 from the remaining number of advantageous stays stored in the main control RAM 40c to update it. The remaining number of advantageous stays is the remaining number of times of the variable game in which it is possible to notify the operation mode of the stop button for deriving the bell stop eye in the advantageous effect state, and it is possible to shift from the advantageous effect state to the normal effect state. It can be said that the number of remaining variable games that can be avoided. After that, the main control CPU 40a ends the first game number subtraction process.

In the second game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag to determine whether the current effect state is the advantageous effect state. When it is not in the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the second game number subtraction process. On the other hand, in the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a subtracts 1 from the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c to update it. The remaining advantageous upper limit value is a value until the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, and when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches 0, the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, and it is advantageous at a predetermined timing thereafter. The period ends. After that, the main control CPU 40a ends the second game number subtraction process.

After finishing the game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a performs a winning combination lottery process for determining a winning number as a winning combination lottery (step S109). In the role lottery process, the main control CPU 40a acquires the value of the role lottery random number. Further, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the game state flag stored in the main control RAM 40c to identify the current game state.
Then, the main control CPU 40a selects the winning combination lottery table corresponding to the specified gaming state. Then, the main control CPU 40a performs the role lottery by referring to the selected role lottery table based on the value of the acquired random number for the role lottery. Specifically, the main control CPU 40a determines the winning number to which the value of the acquired random number for winning combination is assigned. In addition, when the value of the random number for the role lottery is not distributed to the winning numbers that allow the winning of the symbol combination in which the prize is set, the lottery result of the role lottery is “out”. In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs a winning combination lottery process, thereby realizing a function as a winning combination lottery means.

In addition, in the winning combination lottery process, when the main control CPU 40a wins the winning number allowing the winning of the bonus winning combination when the bonus flag that can specify that the winning of the winning combination is permitted is not set, the main bonus is given. Set a bonus flag corresponding to the type of winning combination. The bonus flag includes a first bonus flag that is set when a winning number that allows winning of the first bonus combination is won and a first bonus flag that is set when winning a winning number that allows winning of the second bonus role. There are two bonus flags and a single bonus flag that is set when a winning number that allows the winning of a single bonus combination is won. On the other hand, when the bonus flag has already been set (when the winning of the specific bonus combination has been carried over), the main control CPU 40a newly sets the bonus flag when the winning number allowing the winning of the bonus combination is won. Do not set to.

Further, in the winning combination lottery process, the main control CPU 40a stores, in the main controlling RAM 40c, information capable of specifying the drawing result of the winning combination lottery (hereinafter referred to as winning information). Further, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a winning information command) capable of specifying the lottery result of the winning combination lottery in the output buffer. After storing the winning information command in the output buffer, the main control CPU 40a ends the winning combination lottery process and returns to the game progress main process.

After finishing the winning lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs an advantageous lottery process (step S110). In the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs an advantageous transition lottery process, a ceiling determination process, and an additional lottery process. In the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs the advantageous transition lottery process, and performs the ceiling determination process after finishing the advantageous transition lottery process. Further, in the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs the additional lottery process after finishing the ceiling determination process. Then, in the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a returns to the game progress main process after ending the additional lottery process.

In the advantageous transition lottery process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag to determine whether the current effect state is the normal effect state. When not in the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the advantageous transition lottery process. On the other hand, in the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a stores information (hereinafter, referred to as advantageous change allowance information) capable of specifying that the shift to the advantageous effect state is permitted in the main control RAM 40c. It is determined. Then, when the advantageous transition allowance information is stored in the main control RAM 40c, the main control CPU 40a ends the advantageous transition lottery process. On the other hand, when the advantageous shift allowance information is not stored in the main control RAM 40c, the main control CPU 40a performs the advantageous shift lottery based on the lottery result of the winning combination lottery. The main control CPU 40a of the present embodiment acquires, for example, the value of the random number generated in the main board 40, and refers to a predetermined lottery table based on the acquired value of the random number to acquire the random number. The advantageous transition lottery for determining whether to allow the transition to the advantageous effect state or not permitting the transition to the advantageous effect state is performed according to the value of. The probability that it is determined to allow the transition to the advantageous effect state in the advantageous transition lottery differs depending on the lottery result of the combination lottery. Further, when it is not determined in the advantageous transition lottery that the transition to the advantageous effect state is allowed, the main control CPU 40a ends the advantageous transition lottery process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the advantageous transition lottery that the transition to the advantageous effect state is permitted, the main control CPU 40a stores the advantageous transition permission information in the main control RAM 40c. Further, the main control CPU 40
a stores the control information (hereinafter, referred to as an advantage allowable command) capable of specifying that the transition to the advantageous effect state has been determined in the output buffer, and ends the advantageous transition lottery process.

In the ceiling determination process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag to determine whether the current effect state is the normal effect state. When it is not in the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the ceiling determination process. On the other hand, in the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a updates the normal execution count by adding 1 to the normal execution count stored in the main control RAM 40c. The number of times of normal execution corresponds to the number of times of the variable game executed in the normal effect state without being controlled to the advantageous effect state or the bonus effect state. Further, the main control CPU 40a determines whether the updated normal execution count has reached the ceiling count stored in the main control RAM 40c. If the normal execution count has not reached the ceiling count, the main control CPU 40a ends the ceiling determination process. On the other hand, when the normal execution count reaches the ceiling count, the main control CPU 40a stores the advantageous shift permission information in the main control RAM 40c. Further, the main control CPU 40a stores the advantageous permission command in the output buffer, and ends the ceiling determination process.

In the additional lottery process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag to determine whether the current effect state is the advantageous effect state. When it is not in the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the additional lottery process. On the other hand, in the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a performs the additional lottery based on the lottery result of the combination lottery. The main control CPU 40a of the present embodiment acquires, for example, the value of the random number generated in the main board 40, and refers to a predetermined lottery table based on the acquired value of the random number to acquire the random number. Depending on the value of, the additional lottery to decide whether to add or not to add is performed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to add, the number of additions (so-called number of additions) is also determined. The "addition" here is to increase the number of remaining advantageous stays, and to increase the remaining number of variable games that can notify the operation mode of the stop button for deriving the bell stop eye in the advantageous effect state. This is equivalent to extending the period during which the advantageous effect state is controlled. The "number of times of addition" corresponds to the number of times that the number of remaining advantageous stays is increased, that is, the number of times that is added to the number of remaining advantageous stays. However, when the remaining number of advantageous stays stored in the main control RAM 40c exceeds the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c, the main control CPU 40a causes the additional lottery process to perform additional lottery. And the additional lottery process is terminated. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the second advantageous effect state, it is easier to decide to add in the additional lottery than in the first advantageous effect state. In other words, it can be said that the second advantageous effect state is more advantageous than the first advantageous effect state because there are more opportunities to be added. In the present embodiment, the first advantageous effect state corresponds to the first specific state, and the second advantageous effect state corresponds to the second specific state. Then, in the present embodiment, the second specific state is more advantageous than the first specific state.

When it is determined to add in the additional lottery, the main control CPU 40a adds the determined additional number of times to the remaining advantageous stay number stored in the main control RAM 40c, and updates the remaining advantageous stay number. Further, when the main control CPU 40a determines to add, that is, when the number of additions is determined, the main control CPU 40a stores control information capable of specifying the number of additions (hereinafter referred to as an addition number command) in the output buffer, and adds the control. The lottery process ends.

When the advantageous lottery process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs the instruction information determination process (step S111). In the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a is in the preparation effect state and corresponds to the operation order for winning the promoted re-game combination when the winning number that allows the prize for the promoted re-game combination is won in the role lottery. Determine the instruction information to be used. In the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a is in the advantageous effect state, and when the winning number that allows the winning of the bell combination and the one-piece combination is won in the combination lottery, the operation sequence for winning the bell combination. The instruction number corresponding to is determined. Further, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an instruction information command) capable of specifying the decided instruction information in the output buffer, ends the instruction information determination processing, and returns to the game progress main processing. In the instruction information displayed on the payout display unit 37 in the present embodiment, there is instruction information corresponding to each operation sequence (pushing sequence) of the first to sixth pressing sequences. In the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag to specify the current effect state.

After finishing the instruction information determination processing, the main control CPU 40a performs instruction information display processing (step S112). When the instruction information is determined in the instruction information determination processing, the main control CPU 40a controls the payout display unit 37 so that the determined instruction information is displayed. When the instruction information is not determined in the instruction information determination processing, the main control CPU 40a ends the instruction information display processing and returns to the game progress main processing.

When the instruction information display process is completed, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the wait time (shortest game time) has elapsed (step S113). When the wait time has not elapsed (step S113: NO), the main control CPU 40a waits until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has elapsed (step S113: YES), the main control CPU 40a controls each actuator of the reels 13a to 13c so that the rotation of the reels 13a to 13c is started (step S114). In the slot machine 10, the variation game (game) is started by starting the rotation of the reels 13a to 13c in step S114. As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable game can be played after the determination result of step S106 in the game progression main process is affirmative. That is, the slot machine 10 can play a variable game (game) on condition that the bet number is set. In the process of step S114, the main control CPU 40a waits until the rotation speed of the reels 13a to 13c becomes constant at a predetermined rotation speed and the stop operation by the stop buttons 21a to 21c can be accepted. When the rotation speed of the reels 13a to 13c becomes constant at a predetermined rotation speed, the main control CPU 40a sends control information (hereinafter referred to as a stop acceptance command) that can specify that the stop operation can be accepted. Store in output buffer.

Next, the main control CPU 40a determines whether any one of the stop buttons 21a to 21c has received a stop operation (step S115). In the processing of step S115, the main control CPU 40a inputs a detection signal from any of the stop buttons 21a to 21c while making an affirmative determination when the detection signal is input from any of the stop buttons 21a to 21c. If not, a negative decision is made. When the stop operation has not been received (step S115: NO), the main control CPU 40a waits until the stop operation is received.

On the other hand, when the stop operation is received (step S115: YES), the main control CPU 40a executes reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop button to which the detection signal is input (step S116). That is, the main control CPU 40a controls the actuator triggered by the stop operation to stop the symbol on the reel corresponding to the stop operation. More specifically, the main control CPU 40a, based on the lottery result of the winning combination lottery and the operation mode (operation sequence and operation position (operation timing)) of the stop buttons 21a to 21c, a predetermined drawing range (for example, 4 symbols). ) Searches for a symbol that can be stopped on the activated line YL from the symbols located in (). Then, the main control CPU 40a controls the actuator so that the retrieved symbol is stopped on the activated line YL. The main control CPU 40a performs such reel stop control regarding the stop operation of the reels 13a to 13c to stop the symbol combination according to the winning number and the operation mode of the stop button on the activated line YL. For example, if the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is out of order,
When the bonus flag is set, when the stop buttons 21a to 21c are operated at the stop operation position where the first bonus stop eye can be derived, the reel 13a to so that the first bonus hand is won. Stop 13c. Further, in the process of step S116, when the main control CPU 40a inputs the detection signal from the stop buttons 21a to 21c, the main control CPU 40a outputs the control information (hereinafter, referred to as an operation command) capable of specifying the stop button having input the detection signal. Store in buffer.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a determines whether all of the reels 13a to 13c have been stopped (step S117). When some of the reels 13a to 13c are not stopped (step S117: NO), the main control CPU 40a proceeds to the process of step S115. On the other hand, when all of the reels 13a to 13c are stopped (step S117: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs the addition stagnation process (step S118).

In the additional stagnation process, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not it has been decided to add in the additional lottery process in the advantageous lottery process in step S110. When it has not been decided to add, the main control CPU 40a ends the addition stagnation process and returns to the game progress main process. On the other hand, if it has been decided to add, the main control CPU 40a performs the add-on freeze control, ends the add-on stagnation process after the end of the add-on freeze control, and returns to the game progress main process. In the additional freeze control, the main control CPU 40a measures the additional freeze time. When performing the add-on freeze control, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an add-on freeze start command) capable of specifying that the add-on freeze control is started in the output buffer. Further, in the additional freeze control, the main control CPU 40a waits until the additional freeze time elapses. Then, when the additional freeze time has elapsed, the main control CPU 40a ends the additional freeze control. When ending the add-on freeze control, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter, referred to as an add-on freeze end command) capable of specifying that the add-on freeze control has been ended in the output buffer.

When the addition stagnation control is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs a display symbol determination process for determining a symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL (step S119). In the display symbol determination process, the main control CPU 40a determines whether the symbol combination (winning part) for which the prize is set is stopped on the active line YL, and the symbol combination (winning part) for which the prize is set is stopped on the active line YL. If so, the type of symbol combination is determined. Then, when the symbol combination for which the prize is set is stopped, that is, when the winning combination is won, the main control CPU 40a outputs control information (hereinafter, referred to as a winning command) capable of specifying the winning combination to the output buffer. To store. In addition, in step S119, when the symbol combination for which the re-game is defined as a prize is stopped on the activated line YL, the main control CPU 40a sets the bet number bet in the current variable game as the bet number again. Then, the re-game is activated (it is assumed that the re-game is activated). As a result, the replay game is awarded as a prize.

In the processing of step S119, when the main control CPU 40a determines that the first bonus combination is in the advantageous effect state and the first bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a determines "118" from the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c. Subtract and update the remaining advantageous upper limit value. In the process of step S119, when the main control CPU 40a determines that the second bonus combination has been won in the advantageous effect state, "43" is calculated from the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c. Subtract and update the remaining advantageous upper limit value. If the value to be subtracted (118 or 43) is larger than the remaining advantageous upper limit value, that is, if it is less than 0 when subtracting from the remaining advantageous upper limit value, the main control CPU 40a sets the remaining advantageous upper limit value. The value is set to “0 (zero)” and the remaining advantageous upper limit value is updated.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not to pay out medals to the player (step S120). In the process of step S120, the main control CPU 40a makes an affirmative decision when the payout combination has won, and a negative decision when the payout combination has not won. When paying out medals (step S120: YES), the main control CPU 40a executes medal payout processing (step S121). In the medal payout process, the main control CPU 40a increases the credits stored in the main control RAM 40c by the number of medals to be paid out. At this time, when the credit upper limit number (for example, 50) is exceeded, the main control CPU 40a controls the hopper unit HU so that the number of medals exceeding the credit upper limit number is paid out. Further, in the medal payout process, the main control CPU 40a controls the payout display unit 37 so that the number of medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of a prize is displayed. Incidentally, when a symbol combination for which a prize is not defined (for example, a deviating stop eye) is stopped on the activated line YL, the prize is not awarded.

When the main control CPU 40a does not pay out medals (step S120: NO) and when the medal payout process (step S121) is completed, the main control CPU 40a ends the one variable game. Is performed (step S122). In the ending process, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter, referred to as a variable game end command) capable of specifying the end of the variable game in the output buffer. The variable game end command can specify the presence or absence of a prize and the winning combination.

Further, in the ending process, the main control CPU 40a performs a game state transition process and an effect state transition process. First, the game state transition processing will be described.
In the game state transition process, the main control CPU 40a updates the value of the game state flag in accordance with the lottery result of the role lottery, the current game state and the symbol combination derived in the variable game (eg, winning combination). , The game state is shifted. The main control CPU 40a refers to the game state flag to identify the current game state. The main control CPU 40a identifies the winning combination based on the result of the display symbol determination process (step S119). When the value of the game state flag is updated, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a game state designation command) instructing a game state that can be specified from the updated value in the output buffer.

Specifically, in the game state transition processing, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the second game state to the game state flag when the promoted re-game combination is won in the first game state. Further, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first gaming state in the gaming state flag when a single winning combination is won in the second gaming state. The main control CPU 40a wins the winning number that allows the winning of the first bonus combination in the winning combination lottery, while the first bonus combination does not win, the game state flag is a value that can specify the carryover gaming state. Set to. Further, the main control CPU 40a sets a carry-over gaming state as a gaming state flag that can specify the carry-over gaming state when the winning number allowing the winning of the second bonus winning combination is won in the winning combination lottery but the second bonus winning combination is not won. To do. The main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the carryover gaming state in the gaming state flag when the first bonus flag is set, and sets the carryover gaming state when the second bonus flag is set. You may make it set a identifiable value to a game state flag. Incidentally, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the single bonus flag when the winning number allowing the winning of the single bonus combination is won in the winning combination lottery but the single bonus combination is not won.

When the first bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first bonus game state in the game state flag. Further, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the first bonus flag. Further, while a value that can specify the first bonus game state is set in the game state flag, that is, while in the first bonus game state, the main control CPU 40a, the medal paid out in the first bonus game state Count the number of sheets. When the number of medals paid out in the first bonus game state exceeds 236, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first game state in the game state flag. When the second bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the second bonus game state in the game state flag. Further, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the second bonus flag. Further, while the value that can specify the second bonus game state is set in the game state flag, that is, while in the second bonus game state, the main control CPU 40a, the medal paid out in the second bonus game state. Count the number of sheets. When the number of medals paid out in the second bonus game state exceeds 86, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first game state in the game state flag. When the single bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the single bonus game state in the game state flag. Further, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the single bonus flag. In addition, after the variable game is executed once in the single bonus game state, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first game state in the game state flag.

Next, the effect state transition process will be described.
In the effect state transition processing, the main control CPU 40a updates the value of the effect state flag and shifts the effect state. The main control CPU 40a refers to the effect state flag to specify the current effect state.

In the effect state transition process, the main control CPU 40a sets the number of precursors in the main control RAM 40c when the advantageous control allowance information is stored in the main control RAM 40c in the normal effect state. For example, the number of signs is set to 8 times, 12 times, 32 times, or the like. When the number of signs is 1 or more, the main control CPU 40a subtracts 1 from the number of signs and updates the number of signs. Further, when the number of precursors after the update reaches 0, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the preparation effect state in the effect state flag. In this way, when the advantageous shift permission information is stored and the number of precursors reaches 0, the advantageous permission condition is satisfied.

In the preparation effect state, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state in the effect state flag when the promotion re-game combination is won. At this time, the main control CPU 40a stores "30 times" in the main control RAM 40c as the remaining number of advantageous stays. The number of remaining advantageous stays stored in the main control RAM 40c when transitioning from the preparatory effect state to the first advantageous effect state may not be a predetermined number, for example, the number determined by lottery. May be In this way, the advantageous start condition is satisfied when the promoted re-game combination is won in the preparation effect state.

In the first advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a determines whether to shift to the second advantageous effect state when a predetermined winning number (for example, a winning number that allows winning of the cherry role) is won in the winning combination lottery. Perform an advantageous transfer lottery. The main control CPU 40a of the present embodiment acquires, for example, the value of the random number generated in the main board 40, and refers to a predetermined lottery table based on the acquired value of the random number to acquire the random number. The second advantageous transition lottery for determining whether to shift to the second advantageous effect state or not to shift to the second advantageous effect state is performed according to the value of. The probability that it is decided to shift to the second advantageous effect state in the second advantageous transition lottery differs depending on the lottery result of the combination lottery. When it is determined to shift to the second advantageous effect state in the second advantageous effect lottery, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the second advantageous effect state in the effect state flag. When a value that can specify the second advantageous effect state is set in the effect state flag, the main control CPU 40a sets the second advantageous stay count that corresponds to the number of remaining variable games controlled to the second advantageous effect state, to " 10 times" is stored in the main control RAM 40c. On the other hand, when it is not determined to shift to the second advantageous effect state in the second advantageous effect lottery, the main control CPU 40a does not set a value capable of specifying the second advantageous effect state in the effect state flag. In this way, when it is decided to shift to the second advantageous effect state by the second advantageous effect drawing in the first advantageous effect state, the advantageous promotion condition is satisfied.

In the second advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a updates the second advantageous stay frequency by subtracting 1 from the second advantageous stay frequency stored in the main control RAM 40c every time the variation game is played. Then, when the second number of advantageous stays reaches 0, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state in the effect state flag in the effect state transition processing. In this way, when the number of second advantageous stays reaches 0 in the second advantageous effect state, the advantageous demotion condition is satisfied.

In the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a sets the special advantageous effect state when the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c is smaller than "100". A value that can be specified is set as the effect state flag. In this way, when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches “100” in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, the special advantageous condition is satisfied.

In the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the normal effect state as the effect state flag when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches "0". In this way, when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches “0” in the advantageous effect state, the advantageous ending condition is satisfied. Further, in the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the normal effect state in the effect state flag when the remaining number of advantageous stays reaches "0". As described above, when the number of remaining advantageous stays reaches “0” in the advantageous effect state, the advantageous end condition is satisfied. As described above, the advantageous ending condition is satisfied when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches “0” in the advantageous effect state, and the remaining advantageous stay count is “0” in the advantageous effect state. There is an advantageous ending condition that is satisfied when the number of times of arrival is reached.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the ending condition of the advantageous effect state, the ending condition that is satisfied when the advantageous stay count is “0” without the advantageous upper limit being less than “100” and the advantageous upper limit is “ There is a termination condition that is satisfied when the value becomes less than 100" and the advantageous upper limit value becomes "0" or the advantageous stay frequency becomes "0". In the present embodiment, the end condition that is satisfied when the advantageous upper limit value is less than “100” and the number of advantageous stays is “0” corresponds to the first end condition. Further, in the present embodiment, the termination condition that is satisfied when the advantageous upper limit becomes less than “100” and the advantageous upper limit becomes “0” or the advantageous stay frequency becomes “0” is the second termination. Corresponds to the condition. As described above, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the advantageous effect state corresponding to the specific state includes the first end condition and the second end condition. By the way, the case where the first end condition is satisfied in the slot machine 10 corresponds to the case where the end condition of the advantageous effect state is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state. Further, the case where the second end condition is satisfied in the slot machine 10 corresponds to the case where the end condition of the advantageous effect state is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state.

The main control CPU 40a determines the internal mode when the value of the effect state flag is updated to a value that can specify the normal effect state. The main control CPU 40a determines the internal mode after the transition (internal mode of the transition destination) based on the type of the internal mode before the transition. The main control CPU 40a identifies the type of internal mode before the transition from the value of the internal mode flag stored in the main control RAM 40c. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, the main control CPU 40a has a probability of 85% in the first internal mode and a probability of 13% in the first internal mode when the internal mode before the transition is the first internal mode. 2 internal mode, with a probability of 2%, the third internal mode is determined as the internal mode after transition. Further, after determining the internal mode after the transition, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the determined internal mode after the transition in the internal mode flag. After determining the internal mode after the transition, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an internal mode command) capable of specifying the internal mode in the output buffer. In the present embodiment, the value of the internal mode flag is updated by the main control CPU 40a to control the internal mode as the internal control state, thereby realizing the function as the internal control state means for controlling the internal control state. ..

Further, the main control CPU 40a determines the number of ceilings when the value of the effect state flag is updated to a value that can specify the normal effect state. The main control CPU 40a determines the number of ceilings based on the type of internal mode after the transition. The main control CPU 40a determines the number of ceilings, and then determines the number of ceilings from the number of ceilings. For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the internal mode after transition is the third internal mode, the main control CPU 40a has a probability of 40%, a range of “1 to 70”, and a probability of 60%. A range of the number of times of determining the range of “71 to 128” as the ceiling number of times is determined. At this time, for example, when the range of "71 to 128" is determined, the main control CPU 40a determines the ceiling frequency from the range of "71 to 128" with a uniform probability or a substantially uniform probability. After determining the ceiling number, the main control CPU 40a updates the ceiling number stored in the main control RAM 40c.

When the specific bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the bonus effect state in the effect state flag in the effect state transition process. Specifically, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first bonus effect state in the effect state flag when the first bonus combination is won. When the second bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value that can specify the second bonus effect state as the effect state flag.

When the ending condition of the specific bonus game state is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the production state before the transition to the bonus production state in the production state flag in the production state transition processing. Specifically, when the ending condition of the first bonus game state is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the effect state before the transition to the first bonus effect state to the effect state flag. Further, when the ending condition of the second bonus game state is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the effect state before shifting to the second bonus effect state in the effect state flag. However, when the ending condition of the specific bonus game state is satisfied, and the remaining advantageous upper limit value is a value larger than “0” and smaller than “100”, the effect state before shifting to the bonus effect state is the first. Even in the advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the special advantageous effect state in the effect state flag. Furthermore, when the condition for ending the specific bonus game state is satisfied, if the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches "0", even if the effect state before the transition to the bonus effect state is the advantageous effect state, The control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the normal effect state as the effect state flag. In this case, the main control CPU 40a determines the internal mode after the transition and the number of ceilings. Then, the main control CPU 40a updates the "value of the internal mode flag" and the "ceiling number" stored in the main control RAM 40c.

As shown in FIG. 11, when the end process is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs a special stagnation process (step S123). Note that specific control in the special stagnation process will be described later. Then, when the process of step S123 is completed, the main control CPU 40a ends the game progress main process related to the execution of one variation game, and returns to the process of step S101 again. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the rotation of all reels is started when the start operation is triggered, and the rotation of the reels is stopped when the stop operation is triggered.

In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a may perform a settlement process in addition to the game progress main process. The main control CPU 40a performs the settlement process triggered by the input of the detection signal from the settlement button 19. The main control CPU 40a does not perform the settlement process even if a detection signal is input from the settlement button 19 within the period in which the processes of steps S108 to S123 are performed in the game progress main process. That is, the period during which the settlement process can be performed (hereinafter referred to as the settlement process possible period) is within the period during which the main control CPU 40a performs the processes of steps S101 to S107 in the game progress main process. As described above, in the present embodiment, the settlement process corresponding to the settlement control is performed on condition that the settlement button 19 as the settlement operating means is operated.

When the credit is 1 or more (that is, when there is a credit) during the payment processable period, the main control CPU 40a performs the payment process triggered by the input of the detection signal from the payment button 19. Further, during the settlement processable period, the main control CPU 40a inputs a detection signal from the settlement button 19 when the bet number is 1 or more even when the credit is 0 (that is, when there is no credit). With this as a trigger, the settlement process is performed. However, when the bet number is 1 or more, it is premised that the bet number is not set by the replay. Even when the replay is given and the bet number is 1 or more, if the credit is 1 or more, the main control CPU 40a receives the detection signal from the settlement button 19 as a trigger, Perform the settlement process.

As described above, in the slot machine 10 within the settlement processable period, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 1 or more. Further, in the slot machine 10 within the settlement process possible period, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 0. Further, in the slot machine 10 within the settlement process possible period, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 0 and the bet number is 1 or more. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, even within the settlement processable period, when the credit is 0 and the bet number is 0, the settlement process is not performed even if the settlement button 19 is operated.

In the settlement process, the main control CPU 40a controls the hopper unit HU so as to pay out (settlement) the number of medals stored as the credit when the number of credits stored in the main control RAM 40c is 1 or more. To do. Further, in the settlement process, the main control CPU 40a pays out (settles) the number of medals set as the bet number when the bet number is 1 or more, not during the re-game operation and the hopper unit HU. To control. However, during the re-game operation, the main control CPU 40a does not control the hopper unit HU so as to pay out the number of medals set as the bet number, and if the credit is 1 or more, the credit is concerned. The hopper unit HU is controlled so that only the number of medals memorized as is paid out. In this way, during the re-game operation, the number of medals set as the bet number is not settled. Further, when performing the settlement process, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter, referred to as a settlement command) capable of specifying that the settlement process is performed in the output buffer. The settlement process in this embodiment corresponds to settlement control. Then, in the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs the settlement process, thereby realizing the function as the settlement control means for performing the settlement control.

Next, a process executed by the sub control CPU 41a of the sub board 41 will be described.
When the setting value command is input, the sub control CPU 41a specifies a setting value that can be specified from the setting value command. Then, the sub-control CPU 41a stores setting value information capable of specifying the specified setting value in the sub-control RAM 41c.

When the game state command is input, the sub control CPU 41a updates the game state information stored in the sub control RAM 41c. At this time, the sub-control CPU 41a updates the game state information indicating the game state identifiable from the game state command. The gaming state indicated by the gaming state information corresponds to the gaming state that can be specified from the gaming state information.

When the effect state command is input, the sub control CPU 41a updates the effect state information stored in the sub control RAM 41c. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a updates the production state information indicating the production state that can be specified from the production state command. The effect state indicated by the effect state information corresponds to the effect state that can be specified from the effect state information.

When the bet number setting command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls to a production state that can be specified from the production state information. By the way, after the replay combination is won, the sub-control CPU 41a controls to a production state that can be specified from the production state information when a variable game start command is input. Specifically, when the type of the effect state that can be specified from the effect state information is changed, the sub control CPU 41a controls the changed effect state. On the other hand, if the type of the effect state that can be specified from the effect state information is not changed, the sub-control CPU 41a continues to control the effect state being controlled. For example, when the production state that can be specified from the production state information is changed to the normal production state, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the production display device 14 so that the background image in the normal production state is displayed. Control the production state. In addition, the sub-control CPU 41a normally controls the decoration lamp 15 so as to emit the light emission color in the normal effect state, and controls the speaker 16 so that the background music in the normal effect state is output. Control the production state. In the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the display of the background image in the effect state that can be specified from the effect state information on the effect display device 14, so that the effect state as the effect mode is controlled and the effect mode is changed. A function as an effect mode control means for controlling is realized.

The sub-control CPU 41a counts the number of medals (the number of coins) that have increased from before the start of the first bonus game state until the end of the first bonus game state, and stores them in the sub-control RAM 41c as the first bonus middle acquisition information. Remember. When in the first bonus game state, the sub-control CPU 41a identifies the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning command, adds the identified number to a value identifiable from the first bonus middle acquisition information, Update the information acquired during 1 bonus. In the first bonus game state, when the sub-control CPU 41a inputs the bet number setting command, the bet number specified from the bet number setting command is determined from the value that can be specified from the first bonus mid-acquisition information. Subtract and update the information acquired during the first bonus. It should be noted that the sub-control CPU 41a initializes the first bonus during-acquisition information when the variable game start command is input (the next variable game is executed) after the end of the first bonus game state. ..

The sub-control CPU 41a counts the number of medals (the number of coins) that have increased from before the start of the second bonus game state until the end of the second bonus game state, and stores it in the sub-control RAM 41c as the second bonus medium acquisition information. Remember. In the second bonus game state, the sub-control CPU 41a identifies the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning command, adds the identified number to a value identifiable from the second bonus middle acquisition information, 2 Update the bonus acquisition information. In the second bonus gaming state, when the sub-control CPU 41a inputs the bet number setting command, the bet number specified from the bet number setting command is determined from the value that can be specified from the second bonus mid-acquisition information. Subtract and update the information acquired during the second bonus. It should be noted that the sub-control CPU 41a initializes the second bonus middle acquisition information upon the input of the variable game start command (the next variable game is executed) after the end of the second bonus game state. ..

The sub-control CPU 41a counts the number of medals (the number of medals) acquired since the start of the advantageous period, and stores it in the sub-control RAM 41c as advantageous period acquisition information. In the advantageous period, that is, in the bonus game state (bonus effect state) or the advantageous effect state, the sub control CPU 41a specifies the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning command, and the specified number is advantageous. The period acquisition information is added to the identifiable value to update the advantageous period acquisition information. When the betting number setting command is input, if the betting period is the advantageous period, the sub-control CPU 41a subtracts the betting number specified from the betting number setting command from a value that can be specified from the betting period acquisition information to obtain the betting period. Update the acquisition information. Note that the sub-control CPU 41a receives the advantageous period acquisition information when the variable game start command is input (the next variable game is executed) after the advantageous period ends and the normal production state is controlled. To initialize.

Incidentally, when the winning of the re-gaming combination can be specified from the winning command, the sub-control CPU 41a does not update the advantageous period acquisition information. Further, even when the re-playing combination can be won in the first bonus game state, if the winning of the re-playing combination can be specified from the winning command, the sub-control CPU 41a determines that the first bonus is in progress. Do not update acquisition information. Similarly, in the case where the re-gaming combination can be won in the second bonus game state, if the winning of the re-gaming combination can be specified from the winning command, the sub-control CPU 41a uses the second bonus. Medium Do not update acquisition information.

When the internal mode command is input, the sub control CPU 41a updates the internal mode information stored in the sub control RAM 41c. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a updates the internal mode information to the internal mode information indicating the internal mode that can be specified. The internal mode indicated by the internal mode information corresponds to the internal mode that can be specified from the internal mode information.

When the instruction information command is input, the sub control CPU 41a performs a navigation effect process in which a navigation effect is executed. The sub-control CPU 41a performs the navigation effect process based on the winning number that can be specified from the winning information command and the instruction information that can be specified from the instruction information command. In the navigation effect processing, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the navigation effect that notifies the operation mode of the stop button based on the instruction information that can be specified from the instruction information command is executed.

As shown in FIG. 12A, the navigation effect includes a navigation effect in which the normal navigation images Na1 to Na3 are displayed on the effect display device 14. For example, when the instruction information identifiable from the instruction information command is the instruction information corresponding to the fourth pressing order, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to execute the navigation effect informing the fourth pressing order. Control. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a, the normal navigation image Na1 having "1" in the display area corresponding to the middle reel 13b, the normal navigation image Na2 having "2" in the display area corresponding to the right reel 13c, the left reel. The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the normal navigation image Na3 having “3” is displayed in the display area corresponding to 13a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the navigation effect includes a Bell navigation effect in which the Bell navigation images Nb1 to Nb3 different from the normal navigation images Na1 to Na3 are displayed on the effect display device 14. The Bell Navi effect is a navigation effect that is executed only when the winning of the role of Bell is allowed. For example, when the instruction information that can be specified from the instruction information command is the instruction information corresponding to the fourth pressing order, and it is possible to specify from the winning information command that the winning number that allows the winning of the bell role is won, The sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the bell navigation effect informing the fourth pressing order is executed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a displays a Bell navigation image Nb1 having "1" in the display area corresponding to the middle reel 13b, a Bell navigation image Nb2 having "2" in the display area corresponding to the right reel 13c, and a left reel 13a. The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the bell navigation image Nb3 having “3” is displayed in the corresponding display area.

The sub-control CPU 41a may execute the addition suggestion production that suggests that the addition is performed when the advantageous production state is generated. The additional suggestion effect is executed by the operation of the star movable body 26. The additional suggestion effect is executed when the execution of the additional suggestion effect is decided in the execution additional lottery execution lottery performed when the advantageous effect state is generated. The sub-control CPU 41a, after inputting the stop acceptance command in the advantageous effect state, performs the execution lottery of the additional suggestion effect. The sub-control CPU 41a determines the execution of the addition suggestive effect with a high probability when the addition count command is input, as compared with the case where the addition count command is not input. For this reason, when the star movable body 26 operates, the expectation that an additional ride will be performed increases. When the execution of the additional suggestion effect is decided, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the second actuator A2 to operate the star movable body 26 to execute the additional suggestion effect.

When the additional freeze start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the additional effect is executed. In the additional effect, the sub-control CPU 41a specifies the additional number from the additional number command, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the additional effect that notifies the additional number is executed.

When the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a performs a settlement effect execution process for executing a settlement effect related to the settlement of medals (game media). In the settlement effect execution process, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the settlement effect image SG indicating that the medals are settled is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13A, the settlement effect image SG is an image including the character “character settlement” (character information). That is, the settlement effect has the content of displaying the character “character settlement” (character image). The sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the adjustment effect image SG is displayed for the execution time of the adjustment effect (for example, 5 seconds). In this way, the settlement effect in the present embodiment is executed by displaying the settlement effect image SG on the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, the effect display device 14 corresponds to effect execution means for executing the payment effect relating to the payment of the game medium. In the payment effect execution process, the sub-control CPU 41a may be configured to control the decoration lamp 15 to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the payment effect. In addition, in the settlement effect execution process, the sub control CPU 41a may be configured to control the speaker 16 so that a sound effect corresponding to the settlement effect is output. In this case, it can be said that the decoration lamp 15 and the speaker 16 also correspond to the effect execution means for executing the payment effect related to the adjustment of the game medium.

After the completion of the settlement effect execution process, the sub-control CPU 41a performs a return caution process that executes a caution regarding return of the storage medium. In the return caution process, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the caution image GTx is displayed.

As shown in Fig. 13(b), the warning image GTx shows "Please be careful not to remove the prepaid card. Is an image including the characters (character information). In other words, for the warning about returning the storage medium, "please be careful not to remove the prepaid card." It is the content to display the character (character information). The sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image GTx is displayed for the execution time (for example, 5 seconds) of the attention regarding the return of the storage medium. As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the return of the storage medium is executed by displaying the alerting image GTx on the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, the effect display device 14 corresponds to effect executing means for executing the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. In the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 as the effect execution means, so that the function as the effect control means is realized.

In the return caution process, the sub-control CPU 41a may be configured to control the decoration lamp 15 so as to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the caution regarding return of the storage medium. Further, in the return caution process, the sub-control CPU 41a may be configured to control the speaker 16 so that a sound effect corresponding to the caution regarding return of the storage medium is output. In this case, it can be said that the decoration lamp 15 and the speaker 16 also correspond to the effect execution means for calling attention to the return of the storage medium. Further, in this case, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14, the decorative lamp 15, and the speaker 16 as the effect execution means, so that the function as the effect control means is realized.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the settlement effect regarding the return of the game medium is executed, and then the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. In other words, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the settlement effect regarding the return of the game medium is executed before the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. ..

After the end of the return attention process, the sub control CPU 41a performs a standby effect execution process for executing a standby effect. However, the sub-control CPU 41a does not perform the standby effect execution process even after the end of the return attention process when the replay is provided. That is, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the sub-control CPU 41a performs the standby effect execution process when the re-game is not given, and the sub-control when the re-play is given. The control CPU 41a does not perform the standby effect execution process. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, after the replay combination is won, that is, during the replay operation, the standby effect is not executed. The specific content of the standby effect will be described later.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the standby production is executed after the settlement production relating to the return of the game medium is executed. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the standby effect is executed after the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by the operation of the settlement button 19, after the settlement effect regarding the return of the game medium is executed, the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. After that, the standby effect is executed. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, after the settlement effect regarding the return of the game medium is executed and before the standby effect is performed. Then, a reminder about the return of the storage medium is executed.

As described above, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 1 or more in the slot machine 10 within the settlement process possible period. .. The settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 0. The settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 0 and the bet number is 1 or more. That is, the settlement process is executed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more, and when the settlement button 19 is operated when the bet number is 1 or more. However, the settlement process is not performed when the credit is 0, the replay combination is given, and the bet number is 1 or more.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14, in the slot machine 10, it can be said that the execution start condition of the standby effect is satisfied when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more. However, since the standby effect execution process is not performed when the replay is given, in the slot machine 10, the replay is performed even when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more. When it is provided, the execution start condition of the standby effect is not satisfied, and the standby effect is not executed.

Further, in the slot machine 10, it can be said that the condition for starting execution of the standby effect is satisfied when the settlement button 19 is operated when the bet number is 1 or more. However, since the standby effect execution processing is not performed when the replay is given, even if the settlement button 19 is operated when the bet number is 1 or more in the slot machine 10, the replay is performed. When is given, the execution start condition of the standby effect is not satisfied, and the standby effect is not executed.

Further, as described above, when the credit is 0 and the bet amount is 0, even if the settlement button 19 is operated, the settlement process is not performed. Therefore, when the credit is 0 and the bet number is 0, even if the settlement button 19 is operated, the standby effect is not executed triggered by the operation of the settlement button 19. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated when the credit is 0 and the bet amount is 0, the effect execution means is triggered by the operation of the settlement operation means. As a result, the standby effect is not executed.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, when the waiting time has elapsed without starting the measurement of the waiting time after the measurement of the waiting time is started, the execution start condition of the standby effect may be satisfied. However, even in this case, when the re-game is given, the execution start condition of the standby effect is not satisfied, and the standby effect is not executed.

Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measuring the standby time (for example, 45 seconds) when the variable game end command is input. When the standby time has elapsed since the standby time measurement was started, the sub-control CPU 41a performs a standby effect execution process. In the standby effect execution process, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that a logo effect, various alerts, and a character effect, which will be described later, are executed. The logo effect, various alerts, and character effects that are executed during the execution of the standby effect will be described later. Further, in the standby effect execution process, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the reels 13a to 13c. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL so that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed at least in the transparent area 14a of the effect display device 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control, whereby the function as the special visual recognition control means for executing the special visual recognition control is realized.

However, when the replay is given, the sub-control CPU 41a does not perform the standby effect execution process even if the standby time elapses. When the detection signal from the menu button MB is input during the measurement of the standby time, the sub control CPU 41a stops the measurement of the standby time. When the detection signal is input from the menu button MB after the standby time measurement is stopped, the sub-control CPU 41a starts the standby time measurement. As described above, in the present embodiment, the standby time measurement is reset by operating the menu button MB. Further, when the bet number command is input during the measurement of the waiting time, the sub control CPU 41a stops measuring the waiting time.

As described above, the condition for starting execution of the standby effect in the slot machine 10 is a condition that is satisfied when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more, and the settlement button 19 is operated when the bet number is 1 or more. There is a condition that is satisfied when the waiting time elapses and a condition that is satisfied when the waiting time elapses without resetting the measurement after the measurement of the waiting time is started. However, when the re-game is given, the execution start condition of the standby effect is not satisfied.

Here, the standby effect will be described.
The standby effects in this embodiment include a logo effect, various alerts, and a character effect. In the slot machine 10, after the logo effect is executed, various alerts are executed, and then the character effect is executed. Various alerts executed in the standby production include alerts for goto actions, alerts for hitting a gaming machine, alerts for leaning, alerts for leaving in the car, alerts for playing games under the age of 18. There is also a warning about selling malicious strategies. As will be described in detail later, the standby effect is repeatedly executed until the condition for interrupting the standby effect is satisfied. Therefore, when the interruption condition of the standby effect is not satisfied, after the character effect in the standby effect is executed, the logo effect in the standby effect is executed again.

Hereinafter, the display contents of the effect display device 14 when the standby effect is executed will be described based on FIGS. 15( a) to 15 (d) and FIGS. 16( a) to 16 (d ). When the standby effect is executed, the backlight BL is turned off. When the standby effect is executed, an image of one color (for example, white) is displayed in the transparent area 14a of the effect display device 14.

As shown in FIG. 15A, when the execution of the standby effect is started, the effect effect is displayed on the effect display device 14. The logo effect may be, for example, an effect of displaying the logo mark of the company that manufactures the game machine or an effect that displays the lessons of the company that manufactures the game machine.

As shown in FIG. 15B, after the logo effect is finished, the effect display device 14 calls attention to the goto action. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays the item images TK1 to TK6 indicating the items of attention. In the effect display device 14, the item image TK1 of the item images TK1 to TK6 corresponding to the alert regarding the goto act is displayed larger than the other item images TK2 to TK6. Then, the attention display image GT1 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the goto action is executed. The alert image GT1 says, "Goto is a "crime". Is an image including the characters (character information). That is, the content of the alert regarding the goto action performed during the execution of the standby production is "goto action is a "crime". It is the content to display the character (character information). In this way, in the effect display device 14, the alert regarding the go-to action is executed during the execution of the standby effect. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the attention image GT1 is longer than the horizontal width of one reel in a front view. The width of one reel corresponds to the width of one of the reels 13a to 13c in the circumferential direction.

The attention image GT1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image GT1 is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transparent display. The display area in which the attention image GT1 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. As described above, the display area in which the attention image GT1 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a and is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

As shown in FIG. 15C, after the alerting regarding the goto action is finished, the alerting regarding hitting the gaming machine is executed in the effect display device 14. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays the item images TK1 to TK6. In the effect display device 14, the item image TK2 of the item images TK1 to TK6, which corresponds to the alert for hitting the gaming machine, is displayed larger than the other item images TK1 and TK3 to TK6. Then, the attention display image GT2 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and attention is given to hitting the game machine. The alert image GT2 should be “friendly and important”. Is an image including the characters (character information). In other words, the content of the warning about hitting the gaming machine that is executed during the execution of the standby production is, "Let's touch the table "kindly and carefully". It is the content to display the character (character information). In this way, in the effect display device 14, a caution regarding hitting the game machine is executed during execution of the standby effect. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the attention image GT2 is longer than the horizontal width of one reel in a front view.

Further, the attention image GT2 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image GT2 is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transparent display. Further, the display area in which the attention image GT2 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. As described above, the display area in which the attention image GT2 is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a and does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

As shown in FIG. 15( d ), after the alerting regarding hitting the gaming machine is finished, the effect display device 14 issues alerting regarding the intrusion. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays the item images TK1 to TK6. In the effect display device 14, the item image TK3 corresponding to the alert regarding the intrusion among the item images TK1 to TK6 is displayed larger than the other item images TK1, TK2, and TK4 to TK6. Then, the attention display image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention display is executed. The alert image GT3 shows that "Pachinko/Pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game. The character (character information) and "Let's be careful not to get caught. And the character (character information). In other words, the content of the alert regarding the indulgence that is executed during the execution of the standby production is "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. It is the content to display the character (character information). In addition, the content of the warning about the intrusion that is executed during the execution of the standby production is "Let's be careful of intrusion. It is the content to display the character (character information). In this way, in the effect display device 14, while the standby effect is being executed, a warning regarding the intrusion is executed. In this embodiment, "Pachinko/Pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game. The character "(character information)" corresponds to the first character information, and "Be careful not to get stuck." The character "(character information)" corresponds to the second character information. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the lateral width of the attention image GT3 corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the lateral width of one reel.

Further, the attention image GT3 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image GT3 is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image GT3 is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. The display area in which the attention image GT3 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image GT3 is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image GT3 is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image GT3 is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

As shown in FIG. 16( a ), after the alerting regarding the slip-in is finished, the effect display device 14 alerts the leaving in the vehicle. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays the item images TK1 to TK6. In the effect display device 14, the item image TK4 corresponding to the alert regarding leaving the vehicle in the vehicle among the item images TK1 to TK6 is displayed larger than the other item images TK1 to TK3, TK5, and TK6. Then, the attention display image GT4 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention display regarding the leaving in the vehicle is executed. The warning image GT4 shows "If left unattended in the car, it is "child abuse." Is an image including the characters (character information). That is, the content of the warning regarding leaving in the vehicle during the execution of the standby effect is "
Child abuse”. It is the content to display the character (character information). In this way, the effect display device 14 calls attention to leaving the vehicle inside while the standby effect is being executed. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the attention image GT4 is longer than the horizontal width of one reel in a front view.

Further, the attention image GT4 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image GT4 is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transparent display. The display area in which the attention image GT4 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in the front view. As described above, the display area in which the attention image GT4 is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a and is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

As shown in FIG. 16( b ), after the alert regarding leaving the vehicle inside is finished, the effect display device 14 issues an alert regarding playing a game under the age of 18. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays the item images TK1 to TK6. In the effect display device 14, the item image TK5 corresponding to the alert regarding playing a game under the age of 18 among the item images TK1 to TK6 is displayed larger than the other item images TK1 to TK4. Then, the attention display image GT5 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the playing of the game under the age of 18 is executed. The warning image GT5 is "After pachinko/pachislot is 18 years old". Is an image including the characters (character information). That is, the content of the warning regarding playing a game under the age of 18 that is executed during the execution of the standby production is "After pachinko/pachislot is 18 years old". It is the content to display the character (character information). In this way, in the effect display device 14, while the standby effect is being executed, a warning regarding performing a game under the age of 18 is executed. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the attention image GT5 is longer than the horizontal width of one reel in a front view.

Further, the attention image GT5 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image GT5 is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transparent display. The display area in which the attention image GT5 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in the front view. As described above, the display area in which the attention image GT5 is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a and does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

As shown in FIG. 16C, after the alert regarding playing a game under the age of 18 is finished, the effect display device 14 alerts about selling a malicious strategy. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays the item images TK1 to TK6. In the effect display device 14, the item image TK6 of the item images TK1 to TK6 corresponding to the alert regarding the sale of the malicious strategy is displayed larger than the other item images TK1 to TK5. Then, the caution image GT6 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the caution regarding the sale of the malicious strategy is executed. The caution image GT6 is "Beware of "sweet temptation". Is an image including the characters (character information). In other words, the content of the alert regarding the sale of malicious strategies executed during the execution of standby production is "Beware of "sweet temptation". It is the content to display the character (character information). In this way, in the effect display device 14, while the standby effect is being executed, the alert regarding the sale of the malicious strategy is executed. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the attention image GT6 is longer than the horizontal width of one reel when viewed from the front.

The attention image GT6 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image GT6 is displayed is
In the production display device 14 of the transmissive display, this is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. The display area in which the attention image GT6 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. As described above, the display area in which the attention image GT6 is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a and does not overlap the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

As shown in FIG. 16( d ), after the alerting regarding the sales of the malicious strategy is completed, the character display is executed on the effect display device 14. The character effect may be, for example, an effect of an effect that introduces a character that is a motif of the slot machine 10 or an effect of an effect that explains an effect executed in the slot machine 10.

When the character effect is being executed, the effect display device 14 performs an effect related to the operation of the menu button MB corresponding to a predetermined operation means. When the effect relating to the operation of the menu button MB is executed, the image GMx is displayed on the effect display device 14. The image GMx is an image that includes the text (text information) that indicates that the volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB (text information). .. That is, in the effect regarding the operation of the menu button MB, it is notified that the volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the effect regarding the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is notified that the volume can be adjusted by operating the predetermined operation means. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the image GMx is longer than the horizontal width of one reel when viewed from the front.

Further, the image GMx is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the image GMx is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. The display area in which the image GMx is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. As described above, the display area in which the image GMx is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a and does not overlap the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

As described above, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the standby effect, after the caution regarding the depression is executed, the effect regarding the operation of the menu button MB is executed. That is, during the execution of the standby effect, the effect display device 14 executes the effect concerning the operation of the menu button MB as a predetermined operation means after executing the alerting regarding the intrusion.

Here, a case where the menu button MB is operated will be described.
In the present embodiment, when the menu button MB corresponding to the predetermined operation means is operated during the execution of the standby effect, the execution of the standby effect ends. For example, while the standby effect is being executed, when the menu button MB is operated while the attention image GT3 is displayed and the attention attention is being performed, the execution of the standby effect is ended and the attention attention is given. Execution ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the menu button MB corresponding to the predetermined operation means is operated while the alerting regarding the intrusion is executed during the execution of the standby effect, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is completed. To do.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the menu button MB is operated while the variable game is not being executed, a menu is displayed on the effect display device 14. When the menu is displayed on the effect display device 14, item images KM1 and KM2 capable of specifying items are displayed on the effect display device 14. The first item image KM1 is an item image capable of specifying an item related to volume customization (item related to volume adjustment). The second item image KM2 is an item image capable of specifying an item related to effects (item related to effect explanation) executed in the gaming machine.

Moreover, when the menu is displayed on the effect display device 14, the selection image SS indicating the item being selected is displayed. The selected image SS is an image imitating an arrow. The selected image SS has one of a display mode indicating the first item image KM1 (a display mode shown in FIG. 17A) and a display mode indicating the second item image KM2 (FIG. 17B). The display mode shown in FIG. Then, when the right button SBb is operated while the selected image SS is displayed in the display mode indicating the first item image KM1 as shown in FIG. 17(a), as shown in FIG. 17(b). The selected image SS is displayed in a display mode indicating the second item image KM2. Similarly, when the left button SBd is operated while the selected image SS is displayed in the display mode indicating the second item image KM2 as shown in FIG. 17B, as shown in FIG. The selected image SS is displayed in the display mode indicating the first item image KM1.

As shown in FIG. 17C, when the selection image SS is displayed in the display mode indicating the first item image KM1, that is, when the item related to volume customization is selected, the enter button SBe is operated. In this case, the display content of the effect display device 14 becomes the display content regarding the volume adjustment. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays a first meter Ma and a second meter Mb.

In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the volume of the character voice can be adjusted from four levels. The first meter Ma includes four scales Ma1 to Ma4. Then, the first meter Ma is displayed in a mode according to the stage set as the volume of the character voice. For example, when the volume of the set character voice is at the third level from the minimum volume, the effect display device 14 has three scales Ma1 to Ma3 colored as shown in FIG. 17C. The first meter Ma is displayed.

In the slot machine 10, the volume of the character voice can be adjusted by operating the up button SBa and the down button SBc when the first meter Ma is displayed. Then, when the first meter Ma is displayed, a vertical operation promotion image Sac simulating the up button SBa and the down button SBc is displayed in the vicinity of the display area in which the first meter Ma is displayed. In a situation where the volume of the character voice can be adjusted, when the maximum volume is not reached within the adjustable range of the volume of the character voice, when operating the up button SBa, the volume of the character voice is increased by one step. You can Further, in a situation where the volume of the character voice can be adjusted, when the down volume SBc is operated when the volume of the character voice does not reach the minimum volume within the adjustable range, the volume of the character voice is lowered by one step. Can be made. When the volume of the character voice is adjusted by operating the up button SBa or the down button SBc, the scale (the mode of the first meter Ma) colored in the first meter Ma changes in accordance with the adjustment.

The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the volume of background music can be adjusted from four levels. The second meter Mb includes four scales Mb1 to Mb4. Then, the second meter Mb is displayed in a mode according to the stage set as the volume of the background music. For example, when the volume of the background music being set is the second level from the minimum volume, the effect display device 14 has two scales Mb1 and Mb2 colored as shown in FIG. 17C. The second meter Mb is displayed.

In the slot machine 10, the volume of the background music can be adjusted by operating the right button SBb and the left button SBd when the second meter Mb is displayed. When the second meter Mb is displayed, a left/right operation promotion image Sbd simulating the right button SBb and the left button SBd is displayed in the vicinity of the display area in which the second meter Mb is displayed.
In a situation where the volume of background music can be adjusted, when the volume of the background music does not reach the maximum volume within the adjustable range, when operating the right button SBb, the volume of the background music is increased by one step. You can Further, when the volume of the background music can be adjusted and the volume of the background music does not reach the minimum volume within the adjustable range, when the left button SBd is operated, the volume of the background music is lowered by one step. Can be made When the volume of the background music is adjusted by operating the right button SBb or the left button SBd, the scale (the mode of the second meter Mb) colored in the second meter Mb changes in accordance with the adjustment.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17D, when the selected image SS is displayed in the display mode indicating the second item image KM2, that is, when the item related to the effect executed in the gaming machine is selected. When the decision button SBe is operated, the effect contents of the effect display device 14 are the display contents related to the effect explanation. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays the first explanation image PG1, the second explanation image PG2, and the third explanation image PG3.

The first explanation image PG1 is "When the star movable body moves, it's very hot! Is an image including the characters (character information), and corresponds to an image that is highly expected to be added when the star movable body 26 operates. The second explanation image PG2 is an image that includes the character (character information) according to the navigation in the advantageous effect state (character information), and in the advantageous effect state, the stop button 21a is an operation mode informed by the navigation effect. This corresponds to an image explaining that there is no problem if the user operates ~21c. The third explanation image PG3 is an image including the characters (character information) that "volume can be adjusted from the menu screen", and is an image explaining that the volume can be adjusted after the menu button MB is operated to display the menu. Equivalent to.

In the slot machine 10, when the menu button MB is displayed while the menu is displayed on the effect display device 14, the display of the menu ends, and the effect display device 14 corresponds to the effect state during the stay. The background image is displayed. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the effect display device 14 is the display content related to the volume adjustment, when the menu button MB is displayed, the display of the menu ends, and the effect display device 14 corresponds to the effect state during the stay. The background image is displayed. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, when the effect display device 14 is the display content related to the effect explanation, when the menu button MB is displayed, the display of the menu ends, and the effect display device 14 is brought to the effect state during the stay. The corresponding background image is displayed.

Next, the control related to the menu will be described.
When the detection signal from the menu button MB is input while the variable game is not being executed, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the menu is displayed. Specifically, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first item image KM1, the second item image KM2, and the selection image SS are displayed. It should be noted that when the variable game is not being executed, it means a period before the variable game start command is input and a period after the variable game end command is input.

When the menu is displayed, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the selection image SS is displayed in the display mode indicating the first item image KM1. When the menu is displayed, the selection image SS is displayed in the display mode indicating the first item image KM1, the sub-control CPU 41a receives the detection signal from the right button SBb, The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the selected image SS is displayed in the display mode indicating the two-item image KM2. On the other hand, when the menu is displayed, the selected image SS is displayed in the display mode indicating the second item image KM2, the sub-control CPU 41a receives the detection signal from the left button SBd. , The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the selected image SS is displayed in the display mode indicating the first item image KM1. By the way, when the menu is displayed, the sub-control CPU 41a terminates the display of the menu and controls to the effect state that can be specified from the effect state information when the detection signal from the menu button MB is input. Then, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measuring the standby time.

Then, when the detection signal from the determination button SBe is input when the item related to the volume adjustment is selected, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display content related to the volume adjustment is obtained. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first meter Ma, the second meter Mb, the up/down operation promotion image Sac, and the left/right operation promotion image Sbd are displayed. By the way, when the display content of the effect display device 14 is controlled to the display content related to the volume adjustment, the sub-control CPU 41a terminates the display of the display content related to the volume adjustment when the detection signal from the menu button MB is input. , Control to a production state that can be specified from the production state information. Then, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measuring the standby time.

When controlling the display content related to the volume adjustment, the sub-control CPU 41a stores in the sub-control RAM 41c when the detection signal from the up button SBa or the detection signal from the down button SBc is input. The value of the first volume flag that has been set can be updated. Specifically, when the detection signal from the upper button SBa is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines that the volume identifiable from the first volume flag is 1 when the volume identifiable from the value of the first volume flag is not the maximum volume. The value of the first volume flag is updated to a value that increases in stages. Even when the detection signal from the upper button SBa is input, if the volume that can be specified from the value of the first volume flag reaches the maximum volume, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the sub-control CPU 41a to set the value of the first volume flag. Do not update. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the down button SBc is input, the sub control CPU 41a lowers the volume identifiable from the first volume flag by one step when the volume identifiable from the value of the first volume flag is not the minimum volume. The value of the first volume flag is updated to the value to be set. Even when the detection signal from the down button SBc is input, if the volume that can be specified from the value of the first volume flag reaches the minimum volume, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the sub-control CPU 41a to set the value of the first volume flag. Do not update.

On the other hand, when the display content related to the volume adjustment is controlled, the sub control CPU 41a receives the detection signal from the right button SBb, or the detection signal from the left button SBd, the sub control RAM 41c. The value of the second volume flag stored in can be updated. Specifically, when the detection signal from the right button SBb is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines that the volume identifiable from the second volume flag is 1 when the volume identifiable from the value of the second volume flag is not the maximum volume. The value of the second volume flag is updated to a value that increases in stages. Even when the detection signal from the right button SBb is input, if the volume that can be identified from the value of the second volume flag reaches the maximum volume, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the value of the second volume flag to be reached. Do not update. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the left button SBd is input, the sub control CPU 41a lowers the volume identifiable from the second volume flag by one step when the volume identifiable from the value of the second volume flag is not the minimum volume. The value of the second volume flag is updated to the value to be set. Even when the detection signal from the left button SBd is input, if the volume that can be specified from the value of the second volume flag reaches the minimum volume, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the value of the second volume flag to be reached. Do not update.

When the detection signal from the determination button SBe is input when the item related to effect description is selected, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display content related to effect description is displayed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first explanation image PG1, the second explanation image PG2, and the third explanation image PG3 are displayed. Incidentally, when the display content of the effect display device 14 is controlled to the display content related to the effect description, the sub-control CPU 41a terminates the display of the display content related to the effect description when the detection signal is input from the menu button MB. , Control to a production state that can be specified from the production state information. Then, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measuring the standby time.

Here, the special stagnation process (step S123) in the game progress main process will be described with reference to FIG.
In the specific stagnation process, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the first bonus effect state has ended (step S201). In step S201, the main control CPU 40a determines in the ending process (step S122) whether or not the ending condition of the first bonus game state is satisfied and the effect state flag is set to a value capable of specifying an effect state other than the bonus effect state. judge. The determination that the first bonus effect state has ended in step S201 corresponds to the determination that the last variable game in the first bonus game state has ended.

When the first bonus effect state has ended (step S201: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the first stagnation start command (step S202). In the output process of the first stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer. The first stagnation start command includes a special first stagnation start command and a non-special first stagnation start command. Then, after the end of the first bonus effect state, when the remaining advantageous upper limit value is controlled to the normal effect state, that is, when the first bonus game state is generated, the advantageous period If the ending condition of is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the special first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S202. On the other hand, after the end of the first bonus effect state, if the remaining advantageous upper limit value is not controlled to the normal effect state of "0", that is, the first bonus game state is generated, the advantageous period of If the ending condition is not satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S202.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs an ending time measurement process (step S203). In step S203, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined ending time, and waits until the ending time elapses. Then, when the ending time has elapsed and the ending time measurement process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the first stagnation end command (step S204), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the first stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation end command in the output buffer.

When the first bonus effect state has not ended (step S201: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the second bonus effect state has ended (step S205). In step S205, the main control CPU 40a determines whether the ending condition of the second bonus game state is satisfied in the ending process (step S122) and a value capable of specifying an effect state other than the bonus effect state is set in the effect state flag. judge. The determination that the second bonus effect state has ended in step S205 corresponds to the determination that the final variable game in the second bonus game state has ended.

When the second bonus effect state has ended (step S205: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the second stagnation start command (step S206). In the output process of the second stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer. The second stagnation start command includes a special second stagnation start command and a non-special second stagnation start command. Then, after the second bonus effect state is finished, when the remaining advantageous upper limit value is controlled to the normal effect state of "0", that is, the second bonus game state is generated, which is an advantageous period. If the ending condition of is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the special second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S206. On the other hand, after the end of the second bonus effect state, if the remaining advantageous upper limit value is not controlled to the normal effect state of "0", that is, the second bonus game state is generated, the advantageous period of If the ending condition is not satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S206.

Then, the main control CPU 40a performs an ending time measurement process (step S207). In step S207, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined ending time and waits until the ending time elapses. When the ending time elapses and the ending time measurement process ends, the main control CPU 40a performs a second stagnation end command output process (step S208), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the second stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation end command in the output buffer.

If the second bonus effect state has not ended (step S205: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the advantageous effect state has ended (step S209). In step S209, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the normal effect state in the effect state flag when the end condition (advantageous end condition) of the advantageous effect state is satisfied in the end process (step S122). Determine whether. The determination that the advantageous effect state has ended in step S209 corresponds to the determination that the last variation game in the advantageous effect state has ended.

When the advantageous effect state has not ended (step S209: NO), the main control CPU 40a ends the special stagnation process. On the other hand, when the advantageous effect state has ended (step S209: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs output processing of the third stagnation start command (step S210). In the output process of the third stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation start command in the output buffer. The third stagnation start command includes a special third stagnation start command and a non-special third stagnation start command. When the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state and the normal effect state is controlled (when the second end condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 40a outputs a special third stagnation start command in step S210. Store in buffer. On the other hand, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state (or the second advantageous effect state) and the normal effect state is controlled (when the first end condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 40a in step S210. Stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer.

Then, the main control CPU 40a performs an ending time measurement process (step S211). In step S211, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined ending time and waits until the ending time elapses. When the ending time elapses and the ending time measurement process ends, the main control CPU 40a performs a third stagnation end command output process (step S212), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the third stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation end command in the output buffer.

In the present embodiment, the processing of steps S202 to S204, the processing of steps S206 to S208, and the processing of steps S210 to S212 correspond to stagnation control. In the following description, the processing of steps S202 to S204 is performed, the processing of steps S206 to S208 is performed, and the processing of steps S210 to S212 is performed, respectively. May be done." In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs any one of the processes of steps S202 to S204, steps S206 to S208, and steps S210 to S212 to execute the stagnation control. The function as a control means is realized. In addition, in the present embodiment, among the processing of steps S202 to S204, the processing of steps S206 to S208, and the processing of steps S210 to S212, in the processing of steps S203, S207, and S211, a predetermined ending time is set. Measurement control, that is, measurement control of a predetermined ending time is performed. The stagnation control corresponds to the freeze control, and the execution of the stagnation control is also referred to as “freezing”.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since the processing of steps S202 to S204 and the processing of steps S206 to S208 are performed after the final variation game in the bonus game state corresponding to the special state is finished, the final round in the special state is performed. It can be seen that the stagnation control is executed after the game. Similarly, in the present embodiment, since the processing of steps S210 to S212 is performed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state corresponding to the specific state is finished, the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state. I understand that it will be done.

When the stagnation control is executed in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the ending display is executed in the effect display device 14. In the slot machine 10, the appearance display in which the character appears may be executed on the effect display device 14 while the ending effect is being executed. The effect contents of the appearance effects include effect contents in which the first character appears, effect contents in which the second character appears, and effect contents in which the third character appears.

As shown in FIG. 19A, the effect contents of the appearance effect are determined according to the set values that have been set. Specifically, when the set value is "1", the effect contents in which the first character appears with a probability of 90% and the effect contents in which the second character appears with a probability of 10% are determined as the effect contents of the appearance effect. It When the set value is “2”, the effect contents in which the first character appears with a probability of 50% and the effect contents in which the second character appears with a probability of 50% are determined as the effect contents of the appearance effect. When the set value is "3", the effect content in which the first character appears with a probability of 30%, the effect content in which the second character appears with a probability of 60%, and the third character with a probability of 10% The effect content to be performed is determined as the effect content of the appearance effect.

In the present embodiment, only when the set value is "3", the effect contents in which the third character appears is determined as the effect contents of the appearance effect. Therefore, when the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears, it can be specified that "3" is set as the set value. That is, the effect content in which the third character appears corresponds to the effect content for notifying that the set value is “3”. Further, in the present embodiment, the higher the degree of advantage of the set value, the easier it is to determine the effect contents in which the second character appears compared to the effect contents in which the first character appears. Therefore, when the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the second character appears, it is suggested that the set value that has been set is highly advantageous. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the higher the advantage of the set value, the higher the winning probability of the bonus hand, and the higher the probability of establishing the bonus game state. In other words, in the slot machine 10, the higher the advantage of the set value, the higher the advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state (in particular, the bonus game state). Therefore, the appearance effect can be said to be a specific effect that suggests or notifies the degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state. Further, the appearance effect can be said to be an effect that suggests or informs the set value that has been set, thereby suggesting or notifying the advantage degree regarding the advantageous state.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, during the execution of the ending effect, the effect display device 14 may execute the starry sky effect in which stars, moons, and planets are displayed. The effect contents of the starry sky effect include effect contents in which three stars are displayed, effect contents in which the moon and stars are displayed, and effect contents in which planets and stars are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19B, the effect contents of the starry sky effect are determined according to the set internal mode. Specifically, in the case of the first internal mode, the effect contents in which three stars are displayed with a probability of 70% and the effect contents in which the moon and stars are displayed with a probability of 30% are determined as the effect contents of the starry sky effect. It In the case of the second internal mode, the effect contents in which three stars are displayed with a probability of 40% and the effect contents in which the moon and stars are displayed with a probability of 60% are determined as the effect contents of the starry sky effect. Also, in the third internal mode, there is a 5% probability of displaying 3 stars, a 80% probability of displaying the moon and stars, and a 15% probability of displaying planets and stars. The effect contents to be performed are determined as the effect contents of the starry sky effect.

In the present embodiment, only in the third internal mode, the effect contents of planets and stars are determined as the effect contents of the starry sky effect. Therefore, when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which the planets and stars are displayed, it is possible to specify that the mode is the third internal mode. That is, the effect contents in which the planet and the star are displayed correspond to the effect contents informing that the third internal mode is set. In addition, in the present embodiment, the higher the advantage of the internal mode, the easier it is to determine the effect contents in which the moon and stars are displayed, compared to the effect contents in which three stars are displayed. Therefore, it is suggested that the advantage of the internal mode is high when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which the moon and the stars are displayed. Therefore, the starry sky effect can be said to be an effect that suggests or notifies the internal mode as the internal control state, thereby suggesting or informing the degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the higher the advantage of the internal mode, the easier the number of ceilings (that is, the upper limit of the number of games required until the next advantageous effect state occurs) tends to decrease. That is, in the slot machine 10, the higher the advantage of the internal mode, the higher the advantage of occurrence of the advantageous state (particularly, the advantageous effect state). Therefore, the starry sky effect can be said to be a specific effect that suggests or notifies the degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state. In addition, the starry sky effect can be said to be an effect that suggests or notifies the degree of advantage regarding the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying the upper limit of the number of games required until the advantageous state is next generated.

Next, various ending effects will be described.
In addition, after the main control CPU 40a performs the processes of steps S202 to S204 of the special stagnation process to start the execution of the stagnation control, the effect display device 14 executes the ending effect in the first bonus effect state. .. In addition, after the main control CPU 40a performs the process of steps S204 to S206 of the special stagnation process to start execution of the stagnation control, the effect display device 14 executes the ending effect in the second bonus effect state. .. Further, after the main control CPU 40a performs the steps S210 to S212 of the special stagnation process to start the stagnation control, the effect display device 14 executes the ending effect in the advantageous effect state.

As shown in FIG. 20A, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the first bonus game state, after the end of the last variable game in the first bonus game state, the effect display device 14 A warning image TGa is displayed on the screen, and the warning regarding the intrusion is executed. The alert image TGa says, "Pachinko/pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game. The characters (character information) and "Be careful not to get stuck. And the character (character information). In other words, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the first bonus game state, the alert regarding the intrusion after the end of the final variable game in the first bonus game state is “pachinko Pachi-slot is a fun game to enjoy. ] Is the content to display the character. In addition, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the first bonus game state, the caution regarding the intrusion after the end of the last variable game in the first bonus game state is Let's watch out. It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the width of the attention image TGa corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the attention image TGa is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed is the reels 13a to 13 arranged on the rear side in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display.
This is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area in which c can be visually recognized. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGa is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. The display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGa is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, the ending effect executed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state is finished when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the first bonus game state, Shown as the first ending effect. In the first ending effect, the image 60 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image 60 shows "Congratulations! Is an image including the characters (character information).

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears when the first ending effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays the image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the attention image TGa. That is, in the effect display device 14, the attention image TGa is displayed in front of the image CH3. In addition, when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which three stars are displayed when the first ending effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image YG1 of three stars. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when the alerting regarding the intrusion is executed.

Further, when the first ending effect is being executed, the first special acquisition number effect relating to the number of game media acquired since the start of the first bonus game state is executed. In the first ending effect, the first acquired number image GBa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the first special acquired number effect is executed. The first acquisition number image GBa is an image having the content showing the number of medals increased from before the start of the first bonus game state until the end of the first bonus game state. Therefore, by displaying the first acquired number image GBa on the effect display device 14 and executing the first special acquired number effect, the number of game media increased from before the start of the first bonus game state is notified.

It should be noted that the image 60 displayed when the first ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, the image 60) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image is displayed. The operation of the image is stagnant. That is, in this embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image. Operation is stalled.

As shown in FIG. 20B, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first bonus game state, after the end of the last variable game in the first bonus game state, the effect display device 14 A warning image TGb is displayed on the screen, and a warning regarding the intrusion is executed. The alert image TGb says, "Pachinko/pachislot is a fun game to enjoy. Please be careful of the characters (character information) and "inset." And the character (character information). That is, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first bonus game state, the alert regarding the intrusion after the end of the final variable game in the first bonus game state is “pachinko Pachi-slot is a fun game to enjoy. ] Is the content to display the character. Further, in the case where the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus game state, the caution regarding the influx after the end of the final variable game in the first bonus game state is Let's watch out. It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the attention image TGb corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the attention image TGb is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGb is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as a reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGb is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. Further, the display area in which the attention image TGb is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In this embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGb is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGb is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGb is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, the ending effect executed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state is completed when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus game state, Shown as the second ending effect. In the second ending effect, the image 60 is displayed on the effect display device 14. In the second ending effect, the special image SP is displayed on the effect display device 14. The special image SP is an image including the characters (character information) of "complete conquest".

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears when the second ending effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, on the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed behind the attention image TGb. That is, in the effect display device 14, the attention image TGb is displayed in front of the image CH3. In addition, when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which three stars are displayed when the second ending effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image YG1 of three stars. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when the alerting regarding the intrusion is executed. Further, when the second ending effect is being executed, the first acquired number image GBa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the first special acquired number effect is executed.

The image 60 displayed when the second ending effect is executed is kept displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. In addition, the special image SP displayed when the second ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, the image 60) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image is displayed. The operation of the image is stagnant. That is, in this embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image. Operation is stalled.

As shown in FIG. 20C, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, after the end of the last variable game in the second bonus game state, the effect display device 14 A warning image TGc is displayed on the screen, and the warning regarding the intrusion is executed. The alert image TGc says, "Pachinko/pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game. The characters (character information) and "Be careful not to get stuck. And the character (character information). That is, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, the caution regarding the intrusion after the end of the last variable game in the second bonus game state is “pachinko. Pachi-slot is a fun game to enjoy. ] Is the content to display the character. Further, in the case where the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, the caution regarding the influx after the end of the last variable game in the second bonus game state is Let's watch out. It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the attention image TGc corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the horizontal width of one reel in the front view.

Further, the attention image TGc is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGc is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. The display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGc is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, when the ending condition of the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, the ending effect executed after the final variation game in the second bonus game state is finished, Shown as the third ending effect. In the third ending effect, the image 61 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image 61 shows "Fight! Is an image including the characters (character information).

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the first character appears when the third ending effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays the image CH1 imitating the first character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed behind the attention image TGc. That is, in the effect display device 14, the attention image TGc is displayed in front of the image CH1. When the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which the moon and stars are displayed when the third ending effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays the image YG2 of the moon and stars. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when the alerting regarding the intrusion is executed.

Further, when the third ending effect is being executed, the second special acquisition number effect relating to the number of game media acquired since the second bonus game state was started is executed. In the third ending effect, the second acquired number image GBb is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the second special acquired number effect is executed. The second acquired number image GBb is an image having the content showing the number of medals increased from before the start of the second bonus game state until the end of the second bonus game state. Therefore, by displaying the second acquired number image GBb on the effect display device 14 and executing the second special acquired number effect, the number of game media increased from before the start of the second bonus game state is notified.

Note that the image 61 displayed when the third ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, the image 61) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image is displayed. The operation of the image is stagnant. That is, in this embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image. Operation is stalled.

As shown in FIG. 20D, when the ending condition of the advantageous period is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, after the end of the last variable game in the second bonus game state, the effect display device 14 A warning image TGd is displayed on the screen, and the warning regarding the intrusion is executed. The alert image TGd says, "Pachinko/pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game. The characters (character information) and "Be careful not to get stuck. And the character (character information). That is, when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, the caution regarding the intrusion after the end of the final variable game in the second bonus game state is “pachinko. Pachi-slot is a fun game to enjoy. ] Is the content to display the character. Further, in the case where the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, the caution regarding the intrusion after the end of the last variable game in the second bonus game state is Let's watch out. It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the attention image TGd corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the attention image TGd is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGd is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as a reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGd is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. Further, the display area in which the attention image TGd is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGd is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGd is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGd is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, when the ending condition of the advantageous period is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second bonus game state, the ending effect executed after the final variation game in the second bonus game state is finished, Shown as the fourth ending effect. In the fourth ending effect, the image 61 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, in the fourth ending effect, the special image SP is displayed on the effect display device 14.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the first character appears when the fourth ending effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image C imitating the first character.
H1 is displayed. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed behind the attention image TGd. That is, in the effect display device 14, the attention image TGd is displayed in front of the image CH1. Further, when the fourth ending effect is executed, if the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which the moon and stars are displayed, the effect display device 14 displays the image YG2 of the moon and stars. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when the alerting regarding the intrusion is executed. Further, when the fourth ending effect is being executed, the second acquired number image GBb is displayed on the effect display device 14 and the second special acquired number effect is executed.

It should be noted that the image 61 displayed when the fourth ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. Moreover, the special image SP displayed when the fourth ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, the image 61) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image is displayed. The operation of the image is stagnant. That is, in this embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image. Operation is stalled.

As shown in FIG. 21A, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state (when the first end condition is satisfied), the last variation game in the advantageous effect state. After the end, the attention display image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the inset is executed. The alert image TGe says, "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. The characters (character information) and "Be careful not to get stuck. And the character (character information). That is, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, and the caution regarding the influx after the end of the last variation game in the advantageous effect state is “pachinko/pachislot is appropriate. It is a fun game to enjoy. ] Is the content to display the character. In addition, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, and the caution regarding the influx after the end of the last variation game in the advantageous effect state is "please be careful .. It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the attention image TGe corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the width of one reel.

The attention image TGe is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as a reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGe is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. The display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGe is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state, the ending effect executed after the last variation game in the advantageous effect state is finished is described in the fifth example. Shown as ending production.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the second character appears when the fifth ending effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH2 imitating the second character. At this time, on the effect display device 14, the image CH2 is displayed behind the attention image TGe. That is, in the effect display device 14, the attention image TGe is displayed in front of the image CH2. Further, when the fifth ending effect is executed, if the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which three stars are displayed, the effect display device 14 displays three star images YG1. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when the alerting regarding the intrusion is executed.

Further, when the fifth ending effect is being executed, the specific acquisition number effect concerning the number of game media acquired since the start of the advantageous period is executed. In the fifth ending effect, the specific acquisition number image GBc is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the specific acquisition number effect is executed. The specific acquisition number image GBc is an image having the content showing the number of medals increased from before the start of the advantageous period to the end of the advantageous period. Therefore, by displaying the specific acquisition number image GBc on the effect display device 14 and executing the specific acquisition number effect, the number of game media increased from before the start of the advantageous period is notified. In the present embodiment, the number of game media acquired after the start of the advantageous period is not limited to the number of game media acquired in the advantageous effect state, but in the bonus game state generated during the advantageous effect state. It also includes the number of game media acquired.

In addition, the specific acquisition number image GBc displayed when the fifth ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, the specific image (for example, the specific acquisition number image GBc) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without operating. , The operation of the particular image is stagnant. That is, in this embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the specific state continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image. Operation is stalled.

As shown in FIG. 21B, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state (when the second end condition is satisfied), the effect display device 14 is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is completed. A warning image TGf is displayed on the screen, and a warning regarding the intrusion is executed. The alert image TGf says, "Pachinko/pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game. The characters (character information) and "Be careful not to get stuck. And the character (character information). That is, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state, and the caution regarding the intrusion after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is satisfied, "Pachinko/pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game. ] Is the content to display the character. Also, when the advantageous ending condition is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state, and the caution regarding the influx after the end of the last variation game in the advantageous effect state is "Let's be careful." It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the attention image TGf corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the width of one reel.

The attention image TGf is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as a reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGf is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. Further, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGf is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, the ending effect executed when the advantageous ending condition is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state and executed after the last variation game in the advantageous effect state is shown as the sixth ending effect. In the sixth ending effect, the heart movable body 25 operates. Since the attention image TGf is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25, even when the heart movable body 25 moves in front view, the heart movable body 25 becomes the attention image TGf. Does not suffer. In the sixth ending effect, the special image SP is displayed on the effect display device 14.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears when the sixth ending effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, on the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed behind the attention image TGf. That is, in the effect display device 14, the attention image TGf is displayed in front of the image CH3. Further, when the sixth ending effect is executed, if the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which the planet and the star are displayed, the effect display device 14 displays the image YG3 of the planet and the star. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect corresponding to the specific effect are executed when the alerting regarding the intrusion is executed. Further, when the sixth ending effect is being executed, the specific acquisition number image GBc is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the specific acquisition number effect is executed.

In addition, the specific acquisition number image GBc displayed when the sixth ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. In addition, the special image SP displayed when the sixth ending effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, the specific image (for example, the specific acquisition number image GBc) displayed after the final variation game continues to be displayed without operating. , The operation of the particular image is stagnant. That is, in this embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the specific state continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image. Operation is stalled.

Hereinafter, control related to various ending effects will be described.
First, the control related to the first ending effect will be described.
When the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGa is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S202 of the special stagnation process, the non-special first stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the warning regarding the depression is executed. When the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 60 is displayed.

When the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first acquired number image GBa is displayed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first acquisition number image GBa having the content of notifying the identifiable value from the first bonus acquisition information is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 20A, when the value identifiable from the first bonus acquisition information is “216”, the sub-control CPU 41a includes the character “character acquisition” (character information). The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the first acquired number image GBa is displayed.

When the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. To do. The sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the appearance effect according to the set value that is set. Specifically, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect according to the setting value that can be specified from the setting value information stored in the sub control RAM 41c. In the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect under the determination probability shown in FIG. 19A in accordance with the setting value that can be specified from the setting value information. The sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect when the second ending effect to the sixth ending effect described below are executed, as in the case where the first ending effect is executed. To do.

When the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect contents is executed. To do. The sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect according to the set internal mode. Specifically, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect according to the internal mode that can be specified from the internal mode information stored in the sub control RAM 41c. In the present embodiment, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect according to the internal mode that can be specified from the internal mode information with the determination probability shown in FIG. Note that the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect when the second ending effect to the sixth ending effect described below are executed as well as when the first ending effect is executed. To do.

When the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control. As described above, in the special visual recognition control, the sub control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL so that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed at least in the transparent area 14a of the effect display device 14.

Further, when the first ending effect is executed, that is, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGa and then starts measurement of the specific time. When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGa at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to control. In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the measurement of the specific time to the passage of the specific time corresponds to the specific period. Then, in the present embodiment, the execution period in which the stagnation control including the ending time measured in step S203 is executed is a specific time, that is, shorter than the specific period.

When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to finish the first ending effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, although the display of the image 60, the image related to the appearance effect (for example, the image CH3), the image related to the starry sky effect (for example, the image YG1), and the first acquisition number image GBa ends, The alert image TGa continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet amount is set within a specific time period from the start of the execution of the alerting regarding the entanglement after the final game in the special state (within the specific period) Reminders regarding slipping in will continue to be implemented. Further, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGa to be ended in response to the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet amount is set after a specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion after the final game in the special state is started, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended.

When the settlement command is input during execution of the first ending effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first ending effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGa is also ended. Even if the adjustment command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the caution image to be displayed when ending the first ending effect. The display of TGa is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed.

Next, the control related to the second ending effect will be described.
When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGb is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the special first stagnation start command is stored in the output buffer by the main control CPU 40a in step S202 of the special stagnation process, the special first stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the depression is executed. When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 60 is displayed. When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the special image SP is displayed.

When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first acquired number image GBa is displayed. When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect contents is executed. .. When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect contents is executed. .. When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control.

Further, when the second ending effect is executed, that is, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGb and then starts the measurement of the specific time. When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGb at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to control.

When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to finish the second ending effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, the display of the image 60, the image related to the appearance effect, the image related to the starry sky effect, the special image SP, and the first acquired number image GBa ends, but the attention image TGb continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set within a specific time period (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the alerting regarding the infiltration after the final game in the special state, Reminders regarding entanglement continue to be implemented. On the other hand, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGb to be ended in response to the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set after a specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion after the final game in the special state is started, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended.

When the settlement command is input during execution of the second ending effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second ending effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGb is also ended. Even when the adjustment command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the attention image to be displayed when the second ending effect is ended. The display of TGb is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed.

Next, the control relating to the third ending effect will be described.
When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGc is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S206 of the special stagnation process, the non-special second stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the depression is executed. When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 61 is displayed.

When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second acquired number image GBb is displayed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second acquisition number image GBb having the content of notifying the identifiable value from the second bonus acquisition information is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 20(c), when the value identifiable from the second bonus middle acquisition information is "81", the sub control CPU 41a includes the character "character 81 acquisition" (character information). The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the second acquired number image GBb is displayed.

When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. To do. When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect having the determined effect contents is executed. To do. When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control.

Further, when the third ending effect is executed, that is, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGc, and then starts measurement of the specific time. When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the caution image TGc at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so that In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the measurement of the specific time to the passage of the specific time corresponds to the specific period. Then, in the present embodiment, the execution period in which the stagnation control including the ending time measured in step S207 is executed is a specific time, that is, shorter than the specific period.

When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to finish the third ending effect. To control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, the display of the image 61, the image related to the appearance effect, the image related to the starry sky effect, and the second acquired number image GBb ends, but the attention image TGc continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set within a specific time period (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the alerting regarding the infiltration after the final game in the special state, Reminders regarding entanglement continue to be implemented. Further, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGc to be ended in response to the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set after a specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion after the final game in the special state is started, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended.

When the settlement command is input during execution of the third ending effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third ending effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGc is also ended. Even when the adjustment command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the caution image to be displayed when ending the third ending effect. The display of TGc is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed.

Next, the control relating to the fourth ending effect will be described.
When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGd is displayed. In this embodiment, after the special second stagnation start command is stored in the output buffer by the main control CPU 40a in step S206 of the special stagnation process, the special second stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the depression is executed. When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 61 is displayed. When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the special image SP is displayed.

When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second acquired number image GBb is displayed. When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. .. When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect having the determined effect contents is executed. .. When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control.

Further, when the fourth ending effect is executed, that is, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGd, and then starts measuring the specific time. When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the caution image TGd at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so that

When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to finish the fourth ending effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, the display of the image 61, the image related to the appearance effect, the image related to the starry sky effect, the special image SP, and the second acquired number image GBb ends, but the attention image TGd continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set within a specific time period (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the alerting regarding the infiltration after the final game in the special state, Reminders regarding entanglement continue to be implemented. Further, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGd to be ended in response to the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set after a specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion after the final game in the special state is started, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended.

When the settlement command is input during execution of the fourth ending effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth ending effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGd is also ended. Even when the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the caution image to be displayed when ending the fourth ending effect. The display of TGd is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed.

Next, the control relating to the fifth ending effect will be described.
When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fifth ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGe is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S210 of the special stagnation process, the non-special third stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the depression is executed.

When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the specific acquisition number image GBc is displayed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the specific acquisition number image GBc having the content of notifying a value that can be specified from the advantageous period acquisition information is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 21A, when the value that can be specified from the advantageous period acquisition information is “1012”, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the specific acquisition number including the characters (character information) of “Total 1012”. The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the image GBc is displayed.

When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. To do. When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect contents is executed. To do. When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control.

Further, when the fifth ending effect is executed, that is, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGe and then starts the measurement of the specific time. When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGe at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to control. In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the measurement of the specific time to the passage of the specific time corresponds to the specific period. Then, in the present embodiment, the execution period in which the stagnation control including the ending time measured in step S211 is executed is a specific time, that is, shorter than the specific period.

When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to finish the fifth ending effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, the display of the image related to the appearance effect, the image related to the starlit sky effect, and the specific acquisition number image GBc ends, but the attention image TGe continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet amount is set within a specific time period (from within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the alert regarding the entanglement after the final game in the specific state, Reminders regarding entanglement continue to be implemented. Further, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGe to be ended in response to the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet amount is set after the specific period from the start of the alerting execution after the final game in the specific state, the alerting execution regarding the indulgence ends.

When the settlement command is input during execution of the fifth ending effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fifth ending effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGe is also ended. Even when the adjustment command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the caution image to be displayed when ending the fifth ending effect. The display of TGe is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alerting regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed.

Next, the control relating to the sixth ending effect will be described.
When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the sixth ending effect is executed. Specifically, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGf is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the special third stagnation start command is stored in the output buffer by the main control CPU 40a in step S210 of the special stagnation process, the special third stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the depression is executed. When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the special image SP is displayed.

When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the specific acquisition number image GBc is displayed. When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. .. When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry effect effect of the determined effect contents is executed. .. When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control. In addition, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 to operate the heart movable body 25.

When the sixth ending effect is executed, that is, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGf and then starts measuring the specific time. When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the caution image TGf at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to control.

If the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to finish the sixth ending effect. To control. As a result, the effect display device 14 finishes displaying the image related to the appearance effect, the image related to the starlit sky effect, the special image SP, and the specific acquisition number image GBc, but continues to display the attention image TGf. At this time, the heart movable body 25 operates to the origin 25a and returns to the origin 25a. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet amount is set within a specific time period (from within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the alert regarding the entanglement after the final game in the specific state, Reminders regarding entanglement continue to be implemented. Further, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGf to be ended in response to the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet amount is set after the specific period from the start of the alerting execution after the final game in the specific state, the alerting execution regarding the indulgence ends.

When a settlement command is input during execution of the sixth ending effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the sixth ending effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGf is also ended. Even when the adjustment command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the caution image to be displayed when ending the sixth ending effect. The display of TGf is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed.

Here, the alerting regarding the slip-in performed in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to execute a warning (shown in FIG. 15(d)) relating to the indentation executed by displaying the warning image GT3. Further, the slot machine 10 is related to the alerting (shown in FIG. 20(a)) regarding the inrushing performed by displaying the alerting image TGa and the inrushing performed by displaying the alerting image TGb. It is configured to be able to execute a warning (shown in FIG. 20B). In addition, the slot machine 10 is related to the alerting (shown in FIG. 20C) regarding the inrushing performed by displaying the alerting image TGc, and the inrushing performed by displaying the alerting image TGd. It is configured to be capable of executing a warning (shown in FIG. 20D). In addition, the slot machine 10 is related to the alerting (shown in FIG. 21(a)) relating to the indentation executed by displaying the alerting image TGe and the indentation executed by displaying the alerting image TGf. It is configured to be able to execute a warning (shown in FIG. 21B).

Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the inset that is performed by displaying the alerting image GT3 corresponds to the alert regarding the inset that is performed during execution of the standby effect. In addition, in the present embodiment, the attention alert regarding the inset that is executed by displaying the attention image TGa and the alert attention that is performed by displaying the attention image TGb are the first bonus game. This is equivalent to calling attention to the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the attention alert regarding the slip-in performed by displaying the alert image TGc and the alert regarding the slip-in performed by displaying the alert image TGd are the second bonus game. This is equivalent to calling attention to the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the alerting attention performed by displaying the alerting image TGe and the alerting engagement performed by displaying the alerting image TGf are in the advantageous effect state. This is equivalent to calling attention to the infiltration that is executed after the final variation game.

The warning images GT3, TGa to TGf all show that "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. The character (character information) and "Let's be careful not to get caught. And the character (character information). That is, during execution of the standby effect, it is executed after the final variable game in the first bonus game state, after the final variable game in the second bonus game state, and after the final variable game in the advantageous effect state. The content of the alert regarding the run-in is "Playing with pachinko and pachislot is moderate. It is the content that displays the characters. In addition, during the execution of the standby effect, it is executed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the second bonus game state, and after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. For the content of the alert regarding the run-in, "Let's be careful of run-in." It is the content that displays the characters.

In this way, the content of the alerting that is executed while the standby effect is executed is the same as the content of the alerting that is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game is the same as the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the alerting attention performed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alerting attention performed after the final game in the special state.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, when the single bonus game state is generated even in the bonus game, the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the single bonus game state corresponding to the second special state is generated, the alert regarding the intrusion is not executed, and the specific bonus game state corresponding to the first special state is generated. A warning about being entangled in is executed. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the content of the alerting attention performed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alerting attention performed after the final variation game in the specific bonus game state.

In addition, the content of the alerting that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alerting that is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. In other words, the content of the caution regarding the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is the same as the content of the intent that is executed during the standby effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the alerting attention performed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alerting attention performed after the final game in the specific state.

Also, the content of the caution regarding the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state is the same as the content of the intrusion that is performed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. In other words, the content of the caution regarding the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is the same as the content of the intent that is performed after the final variation game in the bonus game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the alerting regarding the inset that is executed after the final game in the special state is the same as the content of the alerting that is executed after the final game in the specific state.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, during the execution of the standby effect, after the final variable game in the first bonus game state, after the final variable game in the second bonus game state, and in the advantageous effect state. The contents of the alert regarding the infiltration that are executed after the variation game of are common and the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the content of the alert regarding the inset to be executed after the game of the final round in the specific state is the content of the alert about the inset to be executed during the execution of the standby effect, and the final round in the special state. The content is the same as the content of the warning about being entangled after the game. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the inset to be executed after the final game in the special state, the content of the alert regarding to the intent executed during the execution of the standby effect, and the content after the final game in the specific state are executed. It is the same as the content of the warning about being entangled. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the entanglement executed during the execution of the standby production is executed after the game of the final round in the special state and the content of the alert regarding the addiction performed after the final game of the specific state. It is the same as the content of the caution regarding the run-in.

In the slot machine 10, when a warning about being caught is executed, "Pachinko/pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game. The attention display images GT3 and TGa to TGf including the characters (character information) are displayed on the effect display device 14. “Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. The characters "" means a pachinko game machine in which a game ball is used as a game medium (character information) and the character "pachislot" (character information) represents a slot machine in which a medal is used as a game medium. And, are included. In other words, "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. The character (character information) includes a reminder about being absorbed in a variation game (game) on a pachinko machine and a reminder about being involved in a variation game (game) on a slot machine. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the content of the alert regarding the intrusion is the same as the alert regarding the intrusion into the game in the slot machine (the gaming machine in which the first game medium is used as a game medium). 2 includes a warning about the game being played in a game machine in which the game medium is used as the game medium. The reminder about being absorbed in the game in the slot machine (the game machine in which the first game medium is used as a game medium) is equivalent to the reminder of being absorbed in playing the slot machine, and is related to the immersiveness in the slot machine. It is equivalent to a warning. Similarly, a reminder about being absorbed in a game on a pachinko game machine (a game machine in which the second game medium is used as a game medium) is equivalent to a reminder about being absorbed in playing a pachinko game machine. This is equivalent to calling attention to getting into a game machine.

As shown in FIG. 22, for example, in a game arcade, there is a game arcade where a slot machine in which medals are used as game media and a pachinko gaming machine in which game balls are used as game media are installed. As described above, some of the game arcades have game machines in which different game media are used. In such a game arcade, one player may enjoy a floating game on a pachinko gaming machine, or may play a floating game on a slot machine before or after that. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, in addition to calling attention to the devotion to the variable game on the slot machine, executing the alerting to the content including the alerting to the devotion to the game on the pachinko gaming machine, the effect It is possible to execute a reminder about the actual engagement.

In addition, "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. The character “pachinko/pachislot” among the characters “” can be said to be a character (character information) indicating the entire gaming machine. And, "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. "Pachi-slot" among the characters "" can be said to be a character (character information) indicating the slot machine 10 displaying the attention image GT3, TGa to TGf, that is, a character (character information) indicating the gaming machine. In this case, it can be said that the content of the alert regarding the indulgence includes an alert regarding the indulgence in all the gaming machines, in addition to the alert regarding the indulgence in the variable game in the present gaming machine.

Further, in the slot machine 10, whichever one of the attention images GT3, TGa to TGf is displayed to execute the attention alert regarding the engagement, the content of the attention regarding the engagement is the same. On the other hand, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is different in the manner of calling attention to the intrusion.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15D, FIG. 20A to FIG. 20D, FIG. 21A, and FIG. 21B, the attention display image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14. The position to be displayed is different from the position where the attention display images TGa to TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the size of the attention image GT3 displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention images TGa to TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention images TGa to TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of characters (character information) included in the attention image GT3 is different from the typeface of characters (character information) included in the attention images TGa to TGf. Further, the color of characters included in the attention image GT3 (so-called character color) is different from the color of characters included in the attention images TGa to TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert image GT3 is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa to TGf. Here, regarding the image that is displayed when the attention alert regarding indentation is executed, the display position, size, the display area that is displayed, the typeface of the characters included in the image, the color of the characters included in the image, the image It has been shown that the sizes of the characters included in all are different, but if at least one of them is different, it can be said that the manner of calling attention to the intrusion is different.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of alerting regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the alerting aspect regarding the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state. In other words, the manner of alerting the player who is engaged after the final variation game in the bonus game state is different from the manner of alerting that is executed during execution of the standby effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of calling attention to the entanglement executed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the manner of calling attention to the entanglement executed after the final game in the special state.

Further, in the present embodiment, the manner of calling attention to the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the manner of calling attention to the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. In other words, the manner of alerting regarding the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is different from the alerting aspect regarding the intent that is executed during the execution of the standby effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of alerting attention that is performed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the manner of alerting that is performed after the last game in the specific state.

As shown in FIGS. 20( a) to 20 (d ), 21 (a) and 21 (b ), the effect display device 14 displays the attention images TGa to TGd at the effect display device 14. Is different from the position where the attention images TGe and TGf are displayed. In addition, the size of the attention images TGa to TGd displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention images TGe and TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention display images TGa to TGd are displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention display images TGe and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of the characters included in the alert images TGa to TGd is different from the typeface of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. The color of the characters included in the alert images TGa to TGd is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa to TGd is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of alerting regarding the inset to be executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is the aspect of alerting regarding to the infiltration performed after the final variation game in the bonus game state. Different from In other words, the manner of alerting regarding the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state is different from the manner of alerting regarding the inset that is performed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of alerting regarding the invagination performed after the final game in the specific state is different from the manner of alerting regarding the involuntary engagement performed after the final game in the special state.

As shown in FIGS. 20A to 20D, the attention display image T on the effect display device 14 is displayed.
The positions at which Ga and TGb are displayed are different from the positions at which the alerting images TGc and TGd are displayed on the effect display device 14. Moreover, the size of the attention image TGA, TGb displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention image TGc, TGd displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention display images TGa and TGb are displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention display images TGc and TGd are displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGb is different from the typeface of the characters included in the alert images TGc and TGd. The color of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGb is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGc and TGd. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGb is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGc and TGd.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of alerting regarding the sinking executed after the final variable game in the first bonus game state relates to the sinking executed after the final variable game in the second bonus game state. It differs from the form of alerting. In other words, the manner of calling attention to the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the second bonus game state is different from the manner of alerting that is performed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the position where the attention image TGA is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the attention image TGb is displayed on the effect display device 14. .. Further, the size of the alert image TGa displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alert image TGb displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention image TGb is displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of the characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the typeface of the characters included in the alert image TGb. In addition, the color of the character included in the attention image TGa is different from the color of the character included in the attention image TGb. In addition, the size of the character included in the attention image TGa is different from the size of the character included in the attention image TGb.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 20C and FIG. 20D, the position at which the attention image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14 is the position at which the attention image TGd is displayed on the effect display device 14. different. Further, the size of the attention image TGc displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention image TGd displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention image TGd is displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGc is different from the typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGd. Further, the color of the character included in the attention image TGc is different from the color of the character included in the attention image TGd. In addition, the size of the character included in the attention image TGc is different from the size of the character included in the attention image TGd.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of calling attention to the intrusion that is executed when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the bonus game state is advantageous because the bonus game state is generated. This is different from the manner of calling attention to the slip-in that is executed when the condition for ending the period is not satisfied. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the special condition is generated and the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, the alerting mode related to the intrusion is the end of the advantageous period when the special state is generated. This is different from the manner of calling attention to the slip-in performed when the condition is not satisfied. That is, in the present embodiment, the manner of calling attention to the slip-in is that the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied due to the occurrence of the special state, and that the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the special state. Different from the case.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the position at which the attention image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position at which the attention image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14. .. Further, the size of the attention image TGe displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention image TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGe is different from the typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGf. Further, the color of the character included in the alert image TGe is different from the color of the character included in the alert image TGf. In addition, the size of the character included in the attention image TGe is different from the size of the character included in the attention image TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of alerting regarding the engagement performed when the ending condition of the advantageous effect state is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state is advantageous in the special advantageous effect state. This is different from the manner of calling attention to the inset that is executed when the condition for ending the effect state is satisfied. As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the intrusion that is executed when the first termination condition of the termination conditions of the specific state is satisfied and the specific state is terminated is the first of the termination conditions of the specific state. 2 This is different from the mode of calling attention to the engagement that is executed when the specific condition ends when the ending condition is satisfied. That is, in the present embodiment, the manner of calling attention to the slip-in differs depending on whether the first end condition is satisfied and the specific state ends, or when the second end condition is satisfied and the specific state ends.

Here, based on FIGS. 23(a) to 23(c), after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, and during standby effect execution, The description will be made while comparing the display contents of the effect display device 14 when the alerting regarding the intrusion is executed. It should be noted that FIG. 23(a) shows the display contents of the effect display device 14 when the alert regarding the inset after the final variation game in the first bonus game state is executed. As a result, the conditions for ending the advantageous period are not satisfied. In addition, FIG. 23(b) shows the display contents of the effect display device 14 when the alerting regarding the inset after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is executed. It is assumed that the advantageous effect state is not set (for example, the first advantageous effect state).

As shown in FIG. 23(a), after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, a caution image TGa is displayed, and a caution regarding the slip-in is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 23B, after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, the caution image TGe is displayed, and the caution regarding the slip-in is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 23(c), during the execution of the standby effect, the caution image GT3 is displayed, and the caution regarding the intrusion is executed. The attention images GT3, TGa, and TGe include the same characters (character information), respectively. For this reason, the content of the alert regarding the in-running to be executed is the same after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, and during the standby effect. Become.

On the other hand, as described above, the attention images GT3, TGa, and TGe have different positions and display areas displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the alerting images GT3, TGa, and TGe have different sizes. In addition, the characters included in the attention images GT3, TGa, and TGe have different fonts, colors, and sizes. For this reason, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, and during the standby effect, the manner of calling attention to the run-in is different.

However, in the front view, the display area in which the alerting images GT3, TGa, TGe are displayed on the effect display device 14 is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25. That is, the alerting images GT3, TGa, TGe are common in that they are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 in an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(a), the image CH2 is displayed when the attention image TGa is displayed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed. The appearance production is executed. In the appearance production, the set value that has been set is suggested or reported. Further, when the attention image TGa is displayed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed, the planet and star image YG3 is displayed and the starry sky effect is executed. .. In the starry sky production, the internal mode is suggested or reported. Further, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, the caution image TGa is displayed in a display area different from the transparent area 14a, and a warning regarding the intrusion is executed. The backlight BL is turned off when the attention image TGa is displayed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the reel and the symbol from the transparent area 14a. Further, when the alert image TGa is displayed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state and the alert regarding the intrusion is being performed, one color is displayed in the transparent area 14a of the effect display device 14 which is a transparent display. Image is displayed. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the reel and the symbol from the transparent area 14a.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 23B, when the attention image TGe is displayed after the last variation game in the advantageous effect state and the attention regarding the intrusion is performed, the image CH1 appears and appears. The performance is executed. Further, when the attention image TGe is displayed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed, the moon and star image YG2 is displayed and the star effect is executed. Further, after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, the attention image TGe is displayed in the display area different from the transparent area 14a, and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed. Further, the backlight BL is turned off when the attention image TGe is displayed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed. Further, when the attention image TGe is displayed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed, the transparent area 14a of the effect display device 14 which is a transmissive display has a single-color image. Is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23C, the appearance effect is not executed when the attention image GT3 is displayed during the execution of the standby effect and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed. Further, when the attention image GT3 is displayed during the execution of the standby effect and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed, the starry sky effect is not executed. When the attention image GT3 is displayed during the execution of the standby effect and the attention regarding the intrusion is performed, the backlight BL is turned off. Further, when the attention image GT3 is displayed during the execution of the standby effect and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed, a one-color image is displayed in the transparent area 14a of the effect display device 14 which is a transmissive display. ..

Next, after the end of the first bonus game state, after the end of the single bonus game state, and after the end of the first advantageous effect state, based on FIG. 24(a) to FIG. 24(c).
As shown in FIG. 24A, after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t11. In the final variation game in the first bonus game state, it is assumed that the bell role is won. In addition, the production state controlled after the end of the first bonus game state, that is, after the end of the first bonus production state is the normal production state.

In the stagnation control started at timing t11, a predetermined ending time is measured, and the stagnation control is continued for at least the ending time. When the execution of the stagnation control is started at the timing t11, the first ending effect is executed. At this time, the attention display image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention display is executed. Further, it is assumed that the bet button 18 is operated at the timing t12 before the ending time has elapsed after the stagnation control was started. At timing t12, since the stagnation control is being executed, the bet number is not set even if the bet button 18 is operated.

Further, when the bet number is set by operating the bet button 18 at a timing t13 after the ending time has passed from the timing t11 and before the specific time has passed from the timing t11, The ending production of is finished. At this time, the effect display device 14 is controlled to the normal effect state, and the background image in the normal effect state is displayed on the effect display device 14. However, from the timing t11 to the timing t14 when the specific time elapses, the attention display image TGa continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the intrusion is continued to be executed.

On the other hand, when the bet number is set by operating the bet button 18 or the like at the timing t15 after the ending time has passed from the timing t11 and after the specific time has passed from the timing t11, Execution of ending effect 1 ends. At this time, the effect display device 14 is controlled to the normal effect state, and the background image in the normal effect state is displayed on the effect display device 14. In addition, with the completion of the execution of the first ending effect, the display of the attention image TGa is also terminated, and the attention regarding the intrusion is finished.

Incidentally, if the waiting time elapses without setting the bet number even after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t11, the execution of the standby effect is started. Then, while the standby effect is being executed, the attention image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed. In this case, since the first ending effect continues to be executed until the waiting time elapses, the caution display image TGa continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 and the caution regarding the intrusion is continued to be executed. As described above, after the alert regarding the intrusion after the payout combination is won in the final game in the special state is executed, the alert regarding the intrusion is executed at least until a specific time has elapsed. Further, after that, when a predetermined waiting time elapses without setting the number of bets, the execution of the standby effect is started, and a warning regarding the entanglement is executed during the execution of the standby effect.

Further, even if the bet number is set by operating the bet button 18 at the timing t12 when the stagnation control is executed, the bet number is not set, and the next effect state is the normal effect state. It is not controlled by. On the other hand, if it is attempted to set the bet number by operating the bet button 18 at timing t13 or timing t15 after the stagnation control is finished, the bet number is set, and the next production state is controlled to the normal production state. The Rukoto. Therefore, by performing the stagnation control, the control of the effect state that is controlled after the end of the first bonus game state is stalled. Thus, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the special effect mode (the effect state controlled after the end of the bonus game state) is controlled after the final game in the special state. Be stagnant.

As shown in FIG. 24B, when a single bonus combination is won in the variable game executed while being controlled to the normal effect state, it is controlled to the single bonus game state, but as the effect state, it is the normal effect state. Is continuously controlled. Then, when the variable game is executed once in the single bonus game state and the single bonus game state ends, the ending effect is not executed after the single bonus game state ends. Also, the stagnation control is not executed after the end of the single bonus game state. Further, after the single bonus game state is over, the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 24A and 24B, in the slot machine 10, the stagnation control is executed after the end of the first bonus game state, while the stagnation control is executed after the end of the single bonus game state. Not done. Further, in the slot machine 10, while the warning about the intrusion is executed after the end of the first bonus game state, the attention about the intrusion is not executed after the end of the single bonus game state.

As shown in FIG. 24C, after the final variation game in the first advantageous effect state, the execution of the stagnation control is started at timing t21. In the final variation game in the first advantageous effect state, it is assumed that the re-gaming combination has won. The effect state controlled after the end of the first advantageous effect state is the normal effect state.

In the stagnation control started at the timing t21, a predetermined ending time measurement process is performed, and the stagnation control is continued for at least the ending time. Further, when the execution of the stagnation control is started at the timing t21, the fifth ending effect is executed. At this time, the attention display image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention display is executed. Further, it is assumed that the start lever 20 is operated at the timing t22 before the ending time has elapsed after the stagnation control was started. At timing t22, since the stagnation control is being executed, even if the start lever 20 is operated while the replay is given, the variable game is not executed.

If the start lever 20 is operated at the timing t23 after the ending time has elapsed from the timing t21 and before the specific time has elapsed from the timing t21, the execution of the fifth ending effect ends. At this time, the effect display device 14 is controlled to the normal effect state, and the background image in the normal effect state is displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the variation game is executed in response to the operation of the start lever 20 at the timing t23. In addition, from the timing t21 to the timing t24 when a specific time elapses, the attention display image TGe is continuously displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the intrusion is continuously executed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated at the timing t25 after the ending time has elapsed from the timing t21 and after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t21, the execution of the fifth ending effect ends. .. At this time, the effect display device 14 is controlled to the normal effect state, and the background image in the normal effect state is displayed on the effect display device 14. In addition, with the completion of the fifth ending effect, the display of the attention image TGe is also terminated, and the attention regarding the intrusion is finished. In addition, the variation game is executed in response to the operation of the start lever 20 at the timing t25.

By the way, if the start lever 20 is not operated even after the specific time has passed from the timing t21, the fifth ending effect is continuously executed, and the attention display image TGe is continuously displayed on the effect display device 14, so that the caution regarding the slip-in is generated. The arousal continues to be executed. However, even if the standby time elapses without operating the start lever 20 even after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t21, the standby effect is not executed. As described above, after the reminders regarding the devotion after the replay role is won in the final game in the specific state is executed, while the reminders regarding the intrusion are executed at least until the specific time elapses, Even after that, the standby effect is not executed even when the predetermined standby time has elapsed.

At the timing t22 when the stagnation control is being executed, the next variable game is not executed even if the start lever 20 is operated when the re-game is given, and is controlled to the normal effect state that is the next effect state. There is no such thing. On the other hand, if the start lever 20 is operated when the replay is given at the timing t23 or the timing t25 after the stagnation control is finished, the next variation game is executed, and the control is performed in the normal production state that is the next production state. Will be done. Therefore, by performing the stagnation control, the control of the effect state controlled after the end of the first advantageous effect state is delayed. In this way, when the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state, the special effect mode (the effect state controlled after the end of the advantageous effect state (normal effect state)) is performed after the last game in the specific state. The control is stagnant. Further, the execution of the next fluctuating game will be delayed by the execution of the stagnation control.

Further, when shifting from the first advantageous effect state to the normal effect state, the attention image regarding the intrusion is displayed with the attention image TGe displayed before the first variation game in the transitioning normal effect state. That is, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the first specific state to the normal state, a warning regarding the intrusion is executed before the first game in the shifting normal state. In this way, when shifting from the first advantageous effect state to the normal effect state, attention is paid to the intrusion after the execution of the stagnation control is started after the final variation game in the first advantageous effect state. ing. Furthermore, after the execution of the alerting regarding the slip-in is started, the state shifts to the normal effect state. That is, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the first specific state to the normal state, a wakeup alert is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started after the last game in the first specific state. Then, after the execution of the alert for the intrusion is started, the normal state is entered.

Although not shown, in the case of shifting from the first advantageous effect state to the second advantageous effect state, it is not the case of transitioning to the normal effect state after the advantageous effect state is ended, and therefore, the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed. That is, when shifting from the first advantageous effect state to the second advantageous effect state, the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed before the first variation game in the transitioning second advantageous effect state. That is, in the present embodiment, when transitioning from the first specific state to the second specific state, the alert regarding the intrusion is not executed before the first game in the transitioning second specific state. As described above, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the first specific state to the second specific state, the alert regarding the intrusion is not executed before the first game in the transitioning second specific state, and the first specific state is executed. When shifting from the state to the normal state, a wakeup alert is executed before the first game in the shifting normal state.

Further, even when shifting from the second advantageous effect state to the first advantageous effect state, it is not the case where the advantageous effect state ends and the effect state shifts to the normal effect state, so that the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed. That is, when shifting from the second advantageous effect state to the first advantageous effect state, the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed before the first variation game in the transitioning first advantageous effect state. That is, in the present embodiment, when shifting from the second specific state to the first specific state, the alert regarding the intrusion is not executed prior to the first game in the transitioning first specific state.

Similarly, when shifting from the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state to the special advantageous effect state, it is not the case where the advantageous effect state ends and shifts to the normal effect state. Not done. That is, when shifting from the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state to the special advantageous effect state, the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed before the first variation game in the transitioning special advantageous effect state.

Next, based on FIG. 25(a) and FIG. 25(b), the flow of the effect when the settlement button is operated and the settlement process is executed will be described.
As shown in FIG. 25A, when the credit is 30 and the bet number is 3, when the settlement button 19 is operated, the settlement processing is performed. At this time, if the re-play is not given, "30" medals stored as credits and "3" medals set as the bet number are paid out and settled. To be done. Along with this, on the effect display device 14, the payment effect image SG is displayed, and execution of the payment effect is started. After the payment effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays the caution image GTx, and the execution of the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is started. Further, after the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium, the production display device 14 starts executing the standby production.

During the execution of the standby effect, the effect display device 14 displays the caution image GT3, and the caution regarding the intrusion is executed. The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to adjust the volume by operating the menu button MB while the standby effect is being executed. Then, during the execution of the standby effect, an effect that is executed by displaying the image GMx including the characters (character information) that "the volume can be adjusted by pressing the menu button" on the effect display device 14, that is, the menu button MB. The effect related to the operation is performed after the alerting regarding the inset that is performed by displaying the alerting image GT3 is performed. That is, during the execution of the standby effect, the effect display device 14 executes the effect concerning the operation of the menu button MB after executing the alerting regarding the intrusion. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the standby effect, the effect executing unit executes the effect related to the operation of the predetermined operation unit after the alerting regarding the intrusion is executed.

In FIG. 25(b), the settlement button 19 is operated to perform the settlement process when the attention-related image is displayed by displaying the attention image GT3 during execution of the standby effect. It shows the flow of the production when it is done. In the case where the attention image GT3 is displayed and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed, and the credit is 12 and the bet number is 0, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated. .. At this time, "12" medals stored as credits are paid out and settled.

Further, when the settlement button 19 is operated to perform the settlement process, the display of the alerting image GT3 on the effect display device 14 ends, and the execution of the alerting regarding the indentation ends. That is, if the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the inset is being executed, the alerting regarding the inset is completed. Further, along with the execution of the payment process, the effect display device 14 displays the payment effect image SG, and the execution of the payment effect is started. Further, after the payment effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays the caution image GTx, and the execution of the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is started. That is, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the caution regarding the slip-in is being executed, the effect display device 14 finishes executing the caution regarding the slip-in, and executes the caution regarding returning the storage medium. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is being executed, the effect executing means finishes the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium. The arousal is executed. By the way, after the execution of the caution regarding the return of the storage medium, the production display device 14 starts the execution of the standby production. While the standby effect is being executed, the attention image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed.

Note that, in FIG. 25(b), an example is shown in which the settlement button 19 is operated during the execution of the attention-giving attention that is performed by displaying the attention-giving image GT3, but the attention-giving image GT3 is displayed. Not only during the execution of the alert. For example, if the settlement button 19 is operated even when any of the attention images TGa to TGf is displayed, the execution of the attention attention is ended when the settlement button 19 is operated. .. Then, after the execution of the alerting regarding the slip-in is completed, the alerting regarding the return of the storage medium is executed.

Next, based on FIG. 26(a) and FIG. 26(b), the flow of the effect when the settlement button is operated after the winning of the bell role as the payout combination, and the case where the settlement button is operated after the winning of the re-game combination The flow of the production of is explained.

As shown in FIG. 26A, when the winning combination of the bell is won, 10 medals are awarded as a prize and the credit is increased. At this time, it is assumed that the credit after the increase is “26”. After that, before the bet number is set, that is, when the bet number is “0” and the settlement button 19 is operated, the settlement process is executed. At this time, "26" medals stored as credits are paid out and settled. Along with this, on the effect display device 14, the payment effect image SG is displayed, and execution of the payment effect is started. Further, after the payment effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays the caution image GTx, and the execution of the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is started. Further, after the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium, the production display device 14 starts executing the standby production. Further, during the standby effect, the alert image GT3 is displayed, and the alert regarding the depression is executed. As described above, when the settlement button 19 is operated after the winning combination of the bell in the variable game, the settlement process is performed, the execution of the standby effect is started, and a warning about being entangled during the execution of the standby effect is issued. Executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated after the payout combination is won in the game, the settlement control is performed, the execution of the standby effect is started, and a caution regarding intrusion during the execution of the standby effect is performed. The arousal is executed.

As shown in FIG. 26B, when the replay combination is won, no medals are awarded, but the number of bets is set by the replay. At this time, it is assumed that “3” is set as the bet number. After that, when the settlement button 19 is operated before the start lever 20 is operated, the settlement process is executed. At this time, if the credit is “16”, “16” medals stored as the credit are paid out and settled, while “3” is continuously set as the bet number. Along with this, on the effect display device 14, the payment effect image SG is displayed, and execution of the payment effect is started. Further, after the payment effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays the caution image GTx, and the execution of the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is started. However, after the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium, the execution of the standby effect is not started. At this time, for example, when the effect display device 14 is controlled to the normal effect state, the background image in the normal effect state is displayed. As described above, when the settlement button 19 is operated after the replay combination is won in the variable game, the settlement process is performed, but the execution of the standby effect is not started. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated after the replay combination is won in the game, the settlement control is performed, but the execution of the standby effect is not started.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement button 19 is operated after the replay combination is won, the settlement process is performed while the execution of the standby effect is not started, and the settlement button is displayed after the Bell role is won. When 19 is operated, the settlement process is performed, the execution of the standby effect is started, and a warning regarding the intrusion is executed during the execution of the standby effect. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated after the re-playing combination is won, the settlement control is performed, while the execution of the standby effect is not started, and the settlement operation means is operated after the payout combination is won. When it is operated, the settlement control is performed, the execution of the standby effect is started, and a warning regarding the intrusion is executed during the execution of the standby effect.

Further, in the slot machine 10, both in the case where the settlement button 19 is operated after the re-play combination is won in the variable game and in the case where the settlement button 19 is operated after the payout combination is won in the variable game. The effect display device 14 executes the payment effect. That is, in the present embodiment, both in the case where the settlement operation means is operated after the re-play combination is won in the game and in the case where the settlement operation means is operated after the payout combination is won in the game The execution means executes a payment effect relating to the payment of the game medium.

The slot machine 10 of this embodiment has the following effects.
(1) The stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) that occurs after the bonus stop eye (special display result) is derived, and the execution of the stagnation control is started. The warning about being entangled after the call is executed. In this way, after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the stagnation control is executed to temporarily stop the play, and then the alert regarding the intrusion is executed, thereby effectively invoking the alert regarding the intrusion. be able to. In addition, since the alert regarding the intrusion is executed after the final game in the bonus game state, it is possible to suppress the intrusion after the bonus game state ends.

In particular, in a slot machine, even when an effect is being executed, the effect being executed is often interrupted by, for example, inserting a medal or operating a start lever. In such a slot machine, by suspending the play by performing a peculiar control called stagnation control, even in the slot machine, it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the intrusion.

(2) Bonus game when the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied due to the occurrence of the bonus game state (special condition) and when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied due to the occurrence of the bonus game state In the state, the manner of calling attention to the slip-in that is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started after the last variation game (game) is changed. As a result, whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied due to the occurrence of the bonus game state can be grasped from the manner of calling attention to the intrusion. As a result, it is possible to raise the attention to the alerting regarding the intrusion, and it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the intrusion.

(3) To the effect state (special effect mode) controlled after the last variable game in the bonus game state by executing the stagnation control after the last variable game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) Control is stalled. As a result, during the execution of the stagnation control, the player's interest is shifted to the next effect state by being controlled to the effect state that is controlled after the end of the bonus game state, and the attention to the attention regarding the intrusion is reduced. It is possible to suppress such a thing.

(4) When the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state), the specific image (for example, the image 60 or the image 61) displayed after the final variation game. Continues to be displayed without operating, and the operation of the specific image is delayed. For example, if a specific image moves while an attention-giving attention is being executed, the player's interest may shift to the specific image, but the specific image continues to be displayed without being operated. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in calling attention to the intrusion.

(5) In the game arcade, for example, a slot machine in which a medal is used as a game medium (a game machine in which the first game medium is used as a game medium) and a pachinko game machine in which a game ball is used as a game medium ( And a game machine in which the second game medium is used as a game medium). In such a game hall, one player may enjoy (play) a variable game on a slot machine, or may enjoy a variable game on a pachinko game machine. Therefore, the content of the caution regarding the intrusion is set to include the content of a caution regarding the infiltration into the floating game on the pachinko gaming machine, in addition to the attention regarding the infiltration into the floating game (game) on the slot machine. As a result, in addition to alerting players who play on slot machines to being able to immerse themselves in floating games on slot machines, it is possible to execute alerting regarding being enthusiastic about engaging in floating games on pachinko machines, effectively It is possible to carry out a warning regarding the intrusion.

(6) The stagnation control is executed after the last variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) in which the Bellnavi effect as the guide effect for guiding the operation for obtaining the profit is executed, and the execution of the stagnation control After the start of the, the alert for the engagement is executed. In this way, after performing the stagnation control after the last game in the advantageous effect state and temporarily interrupting the play, by executing the reminder about the sneaking-in, effectively executing the screaming about the sneaking-in. You can In addition, since the caution regarding the intrusion is executed after the last game in the advantageous effect state, it is possible to suppress the intrusion after the advantageous effect state is finished.

(7) The case where the number of advantageous stays becomes “0” without the advantageous upper limit value becoming less than “100” corresponds to the case where the first ending condition is satisfied among the ending conditions of the advantageous effect state (specific state). To do. Further, when the advantageous upper limit value is less than “100” and the advantageous upper limit value is “0” or the advantageous stay frequency is “0”, the second end condition of the end conditions of the advantageous effect state Corresponds to the case where Then, when the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous effect state is ended, and when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous effect state is ended, the last fluctuating game in the advantageous effect state (specific state) (Game) The mode of calling attention to the intrusion that is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started is changed. As a result, it becomes possible to understand from the aspect of the caution regarding the indulgence whether one of the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous effect state is ended. As a result, it is possible to raise the attention to the alerting regarding the intrusion, and it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the intrusion.

(8) To the effect state (specific effect mode) controlled after the last variable game in the advantageous effect state by executing the stagnation control after the last variable game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) Control is stalled. As a result, while the stagnation control is being executed, the effect state is controlled to be controlled after the end of the advantageous effect state, so that the player's interest is shifted to the next effect state, and the attention to the attention regarding the intrusion is reduced. It is possible to suppress such a thing.

(9) When the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state), the specific image displayed after the final variation game (for example, the specific acquisition number image GBc) Continues to be displayed without operating, and the operation of the specific image is delayed. For example, if a specific image moves while an attention-giving attention is being executed, the player's interest may shift to the specific image, but the specific image continues to be displayed without being operated. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in calling attention to the intrusion.

(10) When the number of bets (number of bets) is set within the specific period, the alert regarding the sneaking in is continuously executed without ending. Therefore, the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) ) It is possible to execute the alerting regarding the intrusion at least within a specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion later. For this reason, compared to the case where the warning regarding indulgence ends when the bet number is set regardless of the period after the warning regarding inclining is executed, the alert regarding indentation is effectively executed. be able to.

In addition, if the bet number is set after a specific period after the execution of the alerting after the final variation game in the bonus game state is started, the alert about the sinking is set until the bet number is set after the specific period. Is executed, and when the bet number is set after the specific period, the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended. Therefore, even after the final variation game in the bonus game state, even if the bet number is not set within the specific period, it is possible to call attention to the intrusion until the bet number is set after the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively call attention to the depression.

(11) By performing the stagnation control to temporarily alert the player after the play has been stalled, the attention to the entanglement is easily noticed. Further, the specific period is set longer than the execution period in which the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state). As a result, for example, even if a player who is less interested in alerting to sneaking in sets a bet number (betting number) immediately after the stagnation control ends, the alerting to sneaking in should be terminated within the specified period. Continue to run without. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the fact that the alerting regarding the intrusion is not completed, and it is possible to raise the interest in the alerting regarding the intrusion. As a result, it is possible to effectively carry out the alerting for the player's entanglement to the player who is not interested in the alerting for the entanglement.

(12) When the number of bets (number of bets) is set within the specific period, the alert regarding the sneaking in is continuously executed without ending. Therefore, the last variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) ) It is possible to execute the alerting regarding the intrusion at least within a specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion later. For this reason, compared to the case where the warning regarding indulgence ends when the bet number is set regardless of the period after the warning regarding inclining is executed, the alert regarding indentation is effectively executed. be able to.

In addition, if the bet number is set after a specific period after the execution of the alerting after the final variation game in the advantageous production state is started, the alert about the inset is set until the bet number is set after the specific period. Is executed, and when the bet number is set after the specific period, the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended. Therefore, even if the bet number is not set within the specific period after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, it is possible to call attention to the intrusion until the bet number is set after the specific period. Therefore, it is possible to effectively call attention to the depression.

(13) By performing the stagnation control to temporarily alert the player after the play is stalled, the attention to the entanglement is easily noticed. Further, the specific period is set to be longer than the execution period in which the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state). As a result, for example, even if a player who is less interested in alerting to sneaking in sets a bet number (betting number) immediately after the stagnation control ends, the alerting to sneaking in should be terminated within the specified period. Continue to run without. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the fact that the alerting regarding the intrusion is not completed, and it is possible to raise the interest in the alerting regarding the intrusion. As a result, it is possible to effectively carry out the alerting for the player's entanglement to the player who is not interested in the alerting for the entanglement.

(14) The bonus game state (special state) includes a first bonus game state (first special state), a second bonus game state (first special state), and a single bonus game state (second special state). There is. Of these, when the first bonus game state (or the second bonus game state) in which the number of medals that can be acquired (the number of game media) is larger than that in the single bonus game state is generated, Alert is executed. On the other hand, when the single bonus game state in which the number of medals that can be obtained is smaller than that in the first bonus game state (or the second bonus game state) is generated, the alert regarding the intrusion is not executed. did. In this way, even if the caution regarding the intrusion is executed when the single bonus game state in which the number of medals that can be acquired is small is generated, the player may be uncomfortable. Therefore, when the single bonus game state is generated, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by not calling the attention to the intrusion.

In addition, since the number of medals that can be acquired in the single bonus game state is small, even if the single bonus game state occurs, the number of medals that the player can acquire is small, and it is possible that the effect of calling attention to the intrusion is weak. To be On the other hand, since there are many medals that can be acquired in the first bonus game state (or second bonus game state), it is considered that the player has a large number of medals and the effect of calling attention to the intrusion is strong. .. Then, in a situation in which it is considered that the effect of alerting on the intrusion is weak, the alert for the intruding is not executed, and in a situation in which the effect of invoking the alert for the intruding is considered to be strong, an alert for the intruding is executed. As a result, compared to the case where the alerting regarding the depression is always executed when the bonus game state is simply generated, the alerting effect regarding the engagement is further strengthened, and the alerting regarding the engagement is effectively executed. it can.

(15) While the number of variable games (games) in the single bonus game state (second special state) is one, the first bonus game state (first special state) and the second bonus game state (first special state) ), the number of fluctuation games is more than once. Thus, since the number of variable games in the single bonus game state is one, it is possible that the player does not notice that the single bonus game state has occurred. In such a circumstance, when the alerting regarding the entanglement is executed, it is not possible to understand the reason why the alerting regarding the entanglement is executed, and there is a fear that the player is uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent an uncomfortable feeling caused by the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion by not issuing the alerting regarding the intrusion in such a situation.

(16) Of the first bonus game state (first special state), the second bonus game state (first special state), and the single bonus game state (second special state), the last variation in the first bonus game state At the end of the game (game) and after the final variation game in the second bonus game state, attention is paid to the intrusion. In this way, after the enjoyment of the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state, that is, after the medal (game medium) is obtained by the occurrence of the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state, the caution regarding the intrusion By executing the alert, it is possible to enhance the effect of alerting the user to the depression.

(17) When shifting from the first advantageous effect state (first specific state) to the second advantageous effect state (second specific state), before the first fluctuating game (game) in the second advantageous effect state to be transitioned No reminder is issued regarding sneaking in. On the other hand, in the case of shifting from the first advantageous effect state to the normal effect state (normal state), a warning regarding the intrusion is executed before the first fluctuating game in the changing normal effect state. In this way, when shifting from the first advantageous effect state to the normal effect state, a caution regarding depression is executed, so it is possible to attach a break to the transition to the normal effect state while preventing depression. , It is possible to execute a reminder about the engagement without feeling discomfort.

In addition, the situation in which the player shifts from the first advantageous effect state to the second advantageous effect state, which is more advantageous than the first advantageous effect state, improves the interest of the player with respect to the transition to the second advantageous effect state. It is also the situation. For this reason, by not performing the alerting regarding the intrusion, it is possible to suppress the difficulty in improving the interest by performing the alerting regarding the intrusion.

(18) When transitioning from the second advantageous effect state (second specific state) to the first advantageous effect state (first specific state), before the first fluctuating game (game) in the transitional first advantageous effect state No reminder is issued regarding the intrusion. In this way, when the transition is made in the advantageous effect state (specific state), the advantageous effect state is continued, and therefore, when a caution is issued regarding the intrusion due to the transition, a series of advantageous effect states are sufficiently generated. There is a risk that you will not be able to entertain. Therefore, in the advantageous effect state, in both cases of transition from the first advantageous effect state to the second advantageous effect state and transition from the second advantageous effect state to the first advantageous effect state I did not execute the alert. As a result, it is possible to prevent a series of advantageous effect states from being unable to be fully enjoyed by executing the alerting regarding the inset.

(19) When shifting from the first advantageous effect state (first specific state) to the normal effect state (normal state), execution of the stagnation control is started after the final variation game (game) in the first advantageous effect state. Attention is later given to the intrusion, and after the execution of the invocation to the intrusion is started, the normal production state is entered. In this way, the stagnation control is executed, and the reminder about the sneaking-in after the play is temporarily stale is executed, so that the screaming about the sneaking-in is easily noticed. In addition, since the transition to the normal effect state is started after the execution of the alerting regarding the slip-in, the play is temporarily stopped when the advantageous effect state (specific state) is ended and the state is changed to the normal effect state. It is possible to calm down the player, and it is possible to effectively carry out a reminder regarding the intrusion.

(20) When the alert regarding the devotion is being executed, the appearance effect (specific effect) or the starry sky effect (specific effect) is executed in the effect display device 14 (effect executing means) in which the alert regarding the effect of devoting is executed. To be done. The appearance effect and the starlit sky effect are of high interest to the player because they are effects that suggest or inform the degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of an advantageous state such as a bonus game state or an advantageous effect state. In this way, by performing a production (specific production) that is of high interest to the player while the attention-requiring attention is being executed, not only the appearance and starry sky production but also the attention-requiring attention is involved. Therefore, it is possible to effectively carry out a reminder regarding the depression.

(21) The starry sky effect (specific effect) is an effect that suggests or notifies the internal mode (internal control state). By executing the alert regarding the starry sky effect as described above, it is easy to attract the attention of the player who pays attention to what kind of internal mode the internal mode is. Can be run to Then, for example, a player who has predicted or specified the internal mode can be effectively made aware that he/she should pay attention to the intrusion.

(22) Depending on the internal mode (internal control state), the determination rate of the upper limit number of games (ceiling number) required until the next advantageous state occurs is different. Therefore, the starry sky effect (specific effect) is an effect that suggests or informs the upper limit of the number of games required until the next advantageous state occurs. By executing such a reminder regarding the starry sky effect and the devotion, it is easy for the player to pay attention to the upper limit of the number of games required until the next advantageous state is generated, and to such a player. It is possible to effectively carry out a warning regarding the intrusion. Then, for example, a player who has predicted or specified the upper limit of the number of games required until the next advantageous state occurs can be made to effectively recognize that the player should pay attention to the intrusion.

(23) The appearance effect (specific effect) is an effect that suggests or notifies the set value. By executing the alert regarding the appearance effect such as this, it is easy for the player to pay attention to what kind of setting value is set, and the alert regarding the attraction to such a player is issued. It can be executed effectively. Then, for example, a player who has predicted or specified a set value can be made to effectively recognize that he/she should be careful about the intrusion.

(24) In addition to executing the alert regarding the devotion, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect are executed, so that the alert regarding the devotion is executed many times, which causes the player to get bored. Can be suppressed.

(25) In a game arcade, a plurality of game machines are often installed. Then, when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number (betting number) is 1 or more, the situation where the settlement button 19 (settlement operating means) is operated shifts to the play on another gaming machine. May be the situation. Therefore, if the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 1 or more, the execution of the standby effect is started, and the caution regarding the intrusion during the execution of the standby effect is started. The arousal was executed. As a result, it is possible to issue a warning regarding the player's indulgence to a player who is going to play on a different gaming machine, so that the player is not limited to the gaming machine currently playing Can also be called, and it is possible to effectively carry out a warning about the depression.

(26) The situation in which the settlement button 19 (settlement operating means) is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number (bet number) is 0 shifts to play on another gaming machine. May be the situation. Therefore, if the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 1 or more, the execution of the standby effect is started, and the caution regarding the intrusion during the execution of the standby effect is started. The arousal was executed. As a result, it is possible to issue a warning regarding the player's indulgence to a player who is going to play on a different gaming machine, so that the player is not limited to the gaming machine currently playing Can also be called, and it is possible to effectively carry out a warning about the depression.

(27) The situation in which the settlement button 19 (settlement operating means) is operated when the credit is 0 and the bet number (bet number) is 1 or more shifts to play on another gaming machine. May be the situation. Therefore, if the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 1 or more, the execution of the standby effect is started, and the caution regarding the intrusion during the execution of the standby effect is started. The arousal was executed. As a result, it is possible to issue a warning regarding the player's indulgence to a player who is going to play on a different gaming machine, so that the player is not limited to the gaming machine currently playing Can also be called, and it is possible to effectively carry out a warning about the depression.

(28) If the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number (bet number) is 1 or more, the effect display device 14 (effect execution means) , The settlement effect regarding the settlement of the game medium is executed before the standby effect. For example, if the settlement effect is executed after the standby effect is executed after the settlement button 19 is operated, the time from the operation of the settlement button 19 to the execution of the settlement effect becomes long, and the settlement button 19 is pressed. There is a possibility that the player may be wondering if the operation has not been performed or that the player may feel uncomfortable. However, when the adjustment button 19 is operated, the adjustment effect is executed before the standby effect, so that it is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness.

In addition, before the caution regarding the return of the storage medium such as the prepaid card, the effect display device 14 executes the adjustment effect regarding the adjustment of the game medium. By executing the settlement effect as described above, the player can be made aware that the settlement of the medal has been performed by operating the settlement button 19.

(29) Since the player who finishes playing may forget to take out a storage medium such as a prepaid card, a warning about the return of the storage medium is executed after the settlement effect. As a result, not only the warning regarding the slip-in but also the warning regarding the return of the storage medium can be executed, which can contribute to the prevention of forgetting to take the storage medium.

In addition, by executing the alert regarding the return of the storage medium before the standby effect, the effective storage is performed as compared with the case where the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed after the standby effect. It is possible to prevent forgetting to remove the medium.

(30) If a replay is awarded when a replay combination is won, the bet number (bet number) will be set, but since it is not the target of settlement, the settlement process (settlement control) was performed. However, the bet number remains set. If the standby effect is executed in such a situation, there is a possibility that the play ends without the variable game being executed, even though the variable game (game) can be executed. Therefore, by not performing the standby effect when the re-play combination wins, it is possible to prevent the play from ending even though the variable game can be executed.

(31) In a game arcade, a plurality of game machines are often installed. Then, the situation where the settlement button 19 (settlement operating means) is operated may be a situation where the game is transferred to another game machine. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated after the payout combination is won, the execution of the standby effect is started, and a caution regarding the intrusion is executed during the execution of the standby effect. As a result, it is possible to issue a warning regarding the player's indulgence to a player who is going to play on a different gaming machine, so that the player is not limited to the gaming machine currently playing Since it is also possible to call attention to, it is possible to effectively call attention to depression. However, if the re-game is won and the re-game is awarded, the bet number (bet number) will be set, but since it is not subject to settlement, it is assumed that settlement processing (settlement control) has been performed. However, the bet number remains set. If the standby effect is executed in such a situation, there is a possibility that the play ends without the variable game being executed, even though the variable game (game) can be executed. Therefore, by not performing the standby effect when the re-play combination wins, it is possible to prevent the play from ending even though the variable game can be executed.

(32) A case where the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated after the replay combination is won in the variable game (game), and a case where the settlement button 19 is operated after the payout combination is won in the variable game, In any of the above, the effect display device 14 (effect execution means) executes the payment effect relating to the payment of the game medium. By executing such settlement effect, the player can be made aware that the settlement of the game medium has been performed by operating the settlement button 19.

(33) When the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated after the payout combination has been won in the variable game (game), the effect display device 14 (effect execution means) causes the game medium to be adjusted before the standby effect. The settlement effect regarding is executed. For example, if the settlement effect is executed after the standby effect is executed after the settlement button 19 is operated, the time from the operation of the settlement button 19 to the execution of the settlement effect becomes long, and the settlement button 19 is pressed. There is a possibility that the player may be wondering if the operation has not been performed or that the player may feel uncomfortable. However, when the adjustment button 19 is operated, the adjustment effect is executed before the standby effect, so that it is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness.

(34) It is possible to prevent the entanglement by executing the alert for the entanglement. Then, when the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated during the execution of the caution regarding the slip-in, the execution of the caution regarding the slip-in ends, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. By the way, in a game arcade, a plurality of game machines are often installed. Then, the situation in which the settlement button 19 is operated may be a situation in which the game is transferred to another game machine. Then, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the warning regarding the slip-in is being executed, the execution of the warning regarding the slip-in ends, and the warning regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. As a result, the player who finishes the play by forgetting to take out the storage medium can be prevented by executing the alert for the return of the storage medium such as the prepaid card while suppressing the intrusion by performing the alert for the intrusion. This can also be suppressed. As described above, even when the caution regarding the slip-in is executed, when the adjustment button 19 is operated, by executing the caution corresponding to the situation where the adjustment button 19 is operated, It is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the intrusion and the alerting regarding the return of the storage medium.

(35) While the standby effect is being executed, a warning regarding the intrusion is executed. When the standby effect is being executed, it is possible that the player who starts playing may visually recognize the standby effect. By performing the alerting regarding the intrusion while the standby effect is being executed, the alerting regarding the intrusion can be performed to the player who is about to start playing.

(36) When the menu button MB as the predetermined operation means is operated while the alerting regarding the intrusion is being executed during the execution of the standby effect, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended. Therefore, during the execution of the standby effect, the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB is executed after the alerting regarding the depression is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended by the operation of the menu button MB.

(37) If the menu button MB as the predetermined operation means is operated during the execution of the standby effect, the execution of the standby effect also ends. For this reason, during the execution of the standby effect, the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB is executed after the alerting regarding the depression is executed, so that the standby effect is executed for a long time and the game is executed by the standby effect. It is also possible to extend the period for entertaining the person, and it becomes easier to improve the interest by executing the standby production.

(38) Since the volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB as a predetermined operation means, the variable game (game) is performed after the volume is adjusted by operating the menu button MB during execution of the standby effect. Can be executed. That is, since the player can play under a volume that suits his or her preference, the interest can be effectively improved.

(39) In the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB as the predetermined operation means, it is notified that the volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB. For this reason, a player who does not want to adjust the volume does not operate the menu button MB, so that it is possible to prevent the menu button MB from being unnecessarily operated even though he/she does not want to adjust the volume. .. That is, it is possible to effectively prevent the menu button MB from being operated while the alerting regarding the leaning is being performed and the execution of the alerting regarding the leaning being ended.

(40) In the case where the content of the caution regarding the indulgence executed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the content of the caution regarding the involuntary engagement executed after the last variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state), respectively. There is a risk that misidentifications such as alerting to different events may occur. However, by making the content of the alert regarding the entanglement executed during the execution of the standby effect and the content of the alert regarding the entanglement executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state the same, It is possible to call attention to the entanglement and suppress misperception of the attention.

(41) In the case where the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the content of the alert regarding the intent that is executed after the last variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state), respectively. There is a risk that misidentification such as alerting you to a different event may occur. However, by making the content of the caution regarding the intrusion that is executed during the execution of the standby effect and the content of the caution regarding the inrush executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state common, It is possible to call attention to the entanglement and suppress misperception of the attention.

(42) The content of the caution regarding the inset that is executed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) is the last variation game in the execution of the standby effect or in the bonus game state (special state). If the contents are different from the contents of the caution regarding the intrusion that will be executed later, there is a possibility that misidentification such as warning of different events may occur. However, the content of the caution regarding the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game and the content of the intent regarding the engagement that is executed during execution of the standby production. It is the same as the content of the caution regarding the run-in. As a result, it is possible to perform a common alerting regarding the intrusion, and it is possible to suppress misidentification of the alerting.

(43) At least until a specific time elapses after the warning about the intrusion after the payout combination is won in the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) is executed Since it is continuously executed, it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the intrusion after the bonus game state ends. It is also possible to temporarily stop the play after the bonus game state ends, but when the predetermined waiting time elapses without setting the bet number (bet number), the standby effect is executed Executed. As a result, even for a player who has temporarily interrupted play after the bonus game state has ended, it is possible to call out a warning regarding the intrusion in the standby effect and effectively execute an invocation regarding the intrusion.

(44) After the alert regarding the intrusion after the winning combination of the payout combination is won in the final variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (in the specific state), the alert for the intrusion is performed at least until the specific time elapses. Since it is continuously executed, it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the intrusion after the end of the advantageous effect state. It is also possible to temporarily stop the play after the end of the advantageous effect state, but if the predetermined waiting time elapses without the bet number (betting number) being set, the standby effect is executed Executed. As a result, even for a player who has temporarily interrupted play after the end of the advantageous effect state, it is possible to call out a caution regarding the devotion in the standby effect and effectively execute a caution regarding the devotion.

(45) When the re-playing combination is won in the last variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state), a caution is executed regarding the infiltration after the last variation game in the advantageous effect state. After that, at least until the specific time has elapsed, the alerting regarding the intrusion is continuously executed. On the other hand, even after that, the standby effect is not executed even if the predetermined standby time has elapsed. By the way, when the re-game is awarded when the re-game combination is won, the bet number (bet number) is set, and the variable game is enabled. If the standby effect is executed in such a situation, there is a possibility that the user may feel as if the floating game is no longer executable even though the floating game is executable. is there. For this reason, after the replay role is won in the last variation game in the advantageous effect state, even if the predetermined waiting time elapses, the standby effect is not executed, so that the situation in which the variation game can be executed is arbitrary. It is possible to suppress things that make you think that you have ended.

(46) The manner of alerting regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the alerting aspect regarding the inset that is executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state). Thereby, depending on each situation during execution of the standby effect and after the end of the bonus game state, it is possible to effectively execute a caution regarding depression and suppress the depression.

(47) An alerting aspect regarding inset during the execution of the standby effect is different from an alerting aspect regarding inset that is executed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state). Thereby, depending on each situation during the execution of the standby effect and after the end of the advantageous effect state, it is possible to effectively execute the alert regarding the intrusion and suppress the intrusion.

(48) The mode of alerting about the inset that is executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) is executed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state). This is different from the form of alerting about run-in. Thereby, depending on each situation after the bonus game state is finished and after the advantageous effect state is finished, it is possible to effectively call attention to the leaning and suppress the leaning.

(49) In a gaming machine that employs a transmissive display as the effect display device 14, a predetermined caution image (for example, a caution image TGa) is displayed in a display area different from the transparent area 14a (reel visual recognition area). A reminder about being entangled is executed. In this way, since the predetermined alerting image is displayed in a display area different from the transparent area 14a, it is possible to prevent the alerting regarding the slip-in from being an obstacle and giving an unpleasant feeling. Furthermore, it becomes easier to shift the line of sight of the player who is visually recognizing the reel to the predetermined attention image, and by changing the line of sight, the attention to the predetermined attention image can be increased and the attention to the intrusion Can be effectively executed.

(50) When the predetermined effect area in which the alert regarding the inset is executed and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 corresponding to the specific movable body overlap, the heart moves when the alert in the inset is performed. When the body 25 moves, the attention alert regarding indentation cannot be visually recognized, and there is a possibility that the alert attention regarding intrusion cannot be sufficiently executed. Therefore, the predetermined effect area in which the alert regarding the intrusion is executed does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25. As a result, it is possible to prevent the attention evoked due to the operation of the heart movable body 25 from being visually recognized, and it is possible to sufficiently prevent the attention evoked regarding the depression from being executed, and the attention evoked regarding the depression is effectively executed. be able to.

(51) In a front view, the width of a predetermined attention image (for example, the attention image TGa) is longer than the width of one of the reels 13a to 13c. As a result, it is possible to more easily direct the line of sight to the predetermined attention image than the reel, and it is possible to effectively execute the attention regarding the intrusion.

(52) By performing the special visual recognition control, the backlight BL is turned off, and it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the reels 13a to 13c. In this way, the special visual recognition control is performed to make it difficult to visually recognize the reels 13a to 13c, so that the player's line of sight can be easily moved to a predetermined caution image, and the caution regarding the intrusion is effectively executed. You can

(53) By performing the special visual recognition control, an image of one color is displayed in the transparent area 14a (reel visual recognition area), which makes it difficult to visually recognize the reels 13a to 13c. In this way, the special visual recognition control is performed to make it difficult to visually recognize the reels 13a to 13c, so that the player's line of sight can be easily moved to a predetermined caution image, and the caution regarding the intrusion is effectively executed. You can

(54) After the final variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state), the predetermined effect area in which the alert regarding the intrusion is executed is the first special acquisition number effect (special acquisition number effect) or the first special acquisition number effect. 2 When it overlaps with the area where the special acquired number effect (special acquired number effect) is executed, there is a possibility that the warning regarding the full engagement cannot be executed sufficiently. Therefore, after the final variation game in the bonus game state, the predetermined effect area in which the attention regarding the intrusion is executed does not overlap with the area in which the first special acquisition number effect and the second special acquisition number effect are executed. did. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the attention alert regarding the intrusion due to the execution of the first special gained number effect and the second special gained number effect cannot be visually recognized and the attention regarding the infiltration cannot be sufficiently executed. It is possible to effectively carry out the alert regarding the intrusion.

(55) After the final variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state), when the predetermined effect area in which the alert regarding the intrusion is executed overlaps the area in which the specific acquisition number effect is executed, it is sufficient. There is a risk that it will not be possible to call attention to the intrusion. Therefore, after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, the predetermined effect area in which the attention regarding the slip-in is executed does not overlap with the area in which the specific acquisition number effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the attention alert regarding the intrusion due to the execution of the specified number of acquisitions from being visually recognizable and to prevent the attention alert regarding the intrusion enough from being executed, and the attention alert regarding the intrusion is effectively executed. can do.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the gaming machine will be described. The same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description and drawings thereof are omitted.

In the first embodiment, the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the stagnation control is executed before the first variation game in the bonus game state is started, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the intrusion is executed. Further, in the first embodiment, the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the caution regarding the intrusion is executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the stagnation control is executed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the alerting regarding the intrusion is executed.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the preparation effect state is shifted to the advantageous effect state, the state is shifted to the first advantageous effect state. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, when the preparatory effect state is shifted to the advantageous effect state, the advantageous effect state determined by the lottery is selected from the first advantageous effect state and the second advantageous effect state.

Specifically, in the second embodiment, the main control CPU 40a, when storing the advantageous shift allowance information in the main control RAM 40c, sets the type of the advantageous effect state at the start of the advantageous effect state to the first advantageous effect state and the second advantageous effect state. It is decided by lottery from the advantageous production state. Then, when the type of the advantageous effect state at the start of the advantageous effect state is determined, the main control CPU 40a provides information (hereinafter, referred to as start advantageous type information) capable of specifying the determined type of the advantageous effect state. It is stored in the main control RAM 40c.

Further, in the effect state transition process, the main control CPU 40a sets the effect state flag in accordance with the start-time advantageous species information stored in the main control RAM 40c when the promotion replay combination is won in the preparation effect state. Update the value. Specifically, when the first advantageous effect state can be specified from the start-time advantageous species information, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state in the effect state flag. On the other hand, when the second advantageous effect state can be specified from the start-time advantageous species information, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the second advantageous effect state in the effect state flag. At this time, regardless of which one of the value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state and the value capable of specifying the second advantageous effect state is set as the effect state flag, the main control CPU 40a uses the remaining advantageous effect. "30 times" is stored as the number of stays in the main control RAM 40c. Further, only when the production state flag is set to a value capable of specifying the second advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a stores “10 times” in the main control RAM 40c as the second advantageous stay frequency.

Here, the special stagnation process in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the specific stagnation process of the second embodiment, the main control CPU 40a determines whether the first bonus effect state starts (step S301). In step S301, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the first bonus winning combination has been won and a value capable of specifying the first bonus effect state has been set in the effect state flag in the ending process (step S122). It is determined that the first bonus effect state is started in step S301 is determined to be before the first variable game in the first bonus game state is started.

Further, when the first bonus effect state starts (step S301: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the first stagnation start command (step S302). In the output process of the first stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer. Then, the main control CPU 40a performs an opening time measurement process (step S303). In step S303, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined opening time and waits until the opening time elapses. When the opening time elapses and the opening time measurement process ends, the main control CPU 40a performs a first stagnation end command output process (step S304), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the first stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation end command in the output buffer.

When the first bonus effect state does not start (step S301: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the second bonus effect state starts (step S305). In step S305, the main control CPU 40a determines, in the ending process (step S122), whether or not the second bonus winning combination has been set and a value capable of specifying the second bonus effect state has been set in the effect state flag. The determination that the second bonus effect state starts in step S305 corresponds to the determination that it is before the start of the first fluctuating game in the second bonus game state.

When the second bonus effect state starts (step S305: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the second stagnation start command (step S306). In the output process of the second stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer. Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs an opening time measurement process (step S307). In step S307, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined opening time and waits until the opening time elapses. When the opening time elapses and the opening time measurement process ends, the main control CPU 40a performs a second stagnation end command output process (step S308), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the second stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation end command in the output buffer.

When the second bonus effect state does not start (step S305: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the advantageous effect state starts (step S309). In step S309, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state in the effect state flag in the termination process (step S122) in response to the promotion replay combination winning. Determine whether you have done. It is determined that the advantageous effect state is started in step S309 is determined to be before the start of the first variation game in the advantageous effect state.

When the advantageous effect state does not start (step S309: NO), the main control CPU 40a ends the special stagnation process. On the other hand, when the advantageous effect state starts (step S309: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the third stagnation start command (step S310). In the output process of the third stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation start command in the output buffer. The third stagnation start command includes a special third stagnation start command and a non-special third stagnation start command. Then, when a value that can specify the second advantageous effect state is set in the effect state flag upon the winning of the promoted replay combination, the main control CPU 40a outputs the special third stagnation start command to the output buffer in step S310. To store. On the other hand, when the promotion state is set to a value that can specify the first advantageous effect state in response to the winning of the replay combination, the main control CPU 40a outputs a non-special third stagnation start command in step S310. Store in buffer.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs an opening time measurement process (step S311). In step S311, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined opening time and waits until the opening time elapses. When the opening time elapses and the opening time measurement process ends, the main control CPU 40a performs a third stagnation end command output process (step S312) and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the third stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation end command in the output buffer.

In the present embodiment, the processing of steps S302 to S304, the processing of steps S306 to S308, and the processing of steps S310 to S312 correspond to stagnation control. In the following description, the processing of steps S302 to S304 is performed, the processing of steps S306 to S308 is performed, and the processing of steps S310 to S312 is performed, respectively. May be done." In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs any one of the processing of steps S302 to S304, the processing of steps S306 to S308, and the processing of steps S310 to S312 to perform the stagnation control. The function as a control means is realized. In addition, in the present embodiment, among the processing of steps S302 to S304, the processing of steps S306 to S308, and the processing of steps S310 to S312, the processing of steps S303, S307, and S311 has a predetermined opening time. Measurement control, that is, measurement control for a predetermined opening time is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the processes of steps S302 to S304 and the processes of steps S306 to S308 are performed before the first variable game in the bonus game state corresponding to the special state is started, It can be seen that the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the special state is started. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the processes of steps S310 to S312 are performed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state corresponding to the specific state is started, so that the first game in the specific state is executed. It can be seen that the stagnation control is executed before it is started.

In the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed, the effect display device 14 executes the opening effect. In the slot machine 10, the appearance display may be executed on the effect display device 14 while the opening effect is being executed.

Next, various types of opening effects will be described.
In addition, after the main control CPU 40a performs the processes of steps S302 to S304 of the special stagnation process to start the execution of the stagnation control, the effect display device 14 executes the opening effect in the first bonus effect state. .. Further, after the main control CPU 40a performs the steps S304 to S306 of the special stagnation process to start the execution of the stagnation control, the effect display device 14 executes the opening effect in the second bonus effect state. .. Further, after the main control CPU 40a performs the processing of steps S310 to S312 of the special stagnation processing and the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the opening effect in the advantageous effect state.

As shown in FIG. 28A, before the first variation game in the first bonus game state is started, a caution image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a caution message regarding the intrusion is executed. It In other words, the warning about the indulgence that is executed before the first variation game in the first bonus game state is started is "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] Is the content to display the character. In addition, "Be careful of the entanglement" as a reminder about the entanglement that is executed before the first variation game in the first bonus game state is started. It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the width of the attention image TGa corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the attention image TGa is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as a reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGa is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. The display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGa is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, the opening effect executed before the first variation game in the first bonus game state is started is referred to as the first opening effect. In the first opening effect, the image OP1 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image OP1 shows "Starting the first bonus game state! Is an image including the characters (character information). It should be noted that the image OP1 displayed when the first opening effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed before the first fluctuation game in the bonus game state is started, a specific image (for example, image OP1) displayed before the first fluctuation game is started. ) Continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image is delayed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the special state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the special state is started is displayed. It continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image is stagnated.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears when the first opening effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the attention image TGa. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when the attention-related attention is executed.

As shown in FIG. 28B, before the first variation game in the second bonus game state is started, a caution image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a caution message regarding the intrusion is executed. It In other words, the warning about the indulgence that is executed before the first variation game in the second bonus game state is started is "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] Is the content to display the character. In addition, "Be careful of the entanglement" as a reminder about the entanglement that is executed before the first variation game in the second bonus game state is started. It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the attention image TGc corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the horizontal width of one reel in the front view.

Further, the attention image TGc is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGc is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. The display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGc is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, the opening effect executed before the first variation game in the second bonus game state is started is referred to as the second opening effect. In the second opening effect, the image OP2 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image OP2 shows "Starting the second bonus game state! Is an image including the characters (character information). The image OP2 displayed when the second opening effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed before the first variation game in the bonus game state is started, a specific image (for example, image OP2) displayed before the first variation game is started. ) Is not displayed and continues to be displayed, and the operation of the specific image is stopped. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the special state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the special state is started is displayed. It continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image is delayed.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the first character appears when the second opening effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH1 imitating the first character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed behind the attention image TGc. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when the attention-related attention is executed.

As shown in FIG. 28(c), before the first variation game in the first advantageous effect state is started, the caution display image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the caution regarding the intrusion is executed. It In other words, the warning about the indulgence that is executed before the first fluctuating game in the first advantageous effect state is started is "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] Is the content to display the character. Also, as for the caution regarding the engagement that is executed before the first variation game in the first advantageous effect state starts, "Be careful about engagement." It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the attention image TGe corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the width of one reel.

The attention image TGe is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as a reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGe is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. The display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGe is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, the opening effect executed before the first variation game in the first advantageous effect state is started is referred to as a third opening effect. In the third opening effect, the image OP3 is displayed on the effect display device 14. The image OP3 shows “The first advantageous effect state has entered! Is an image including the characters (character information). The image OP3 displayed when the third opening effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed before the first fluctuation game in the advantageous effect state is started, the specific image (for example, the image OP3 displayed before the first fluctuation game is started). ) Continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image is delayed. That is, in this embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the specific state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the specific state is started is displayed. It continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image is stagnated.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the second character appears when the third opening effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays the image CH2 imitating the second character. At this time, on the effect display device 14, the image CH2 is displayed behind the attention image TGe. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when the attention-related attention is executed.

As shown in FIG. 28D, before the first variation game in the second advantageous effect state is started, a caution image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a caution message regarding the intrusion is executed. R. In other words, the warning about the indulgence that is executed before the first fluctuating game in the second advantageous effect state is started is "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] Is the content to display the character. Also, as for the caution regarding the engagement that is executed before the first variation game in the second advantageous effect state starts, "Be careful about engagement." It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the attention image TGf corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the width of one reel.

The attention image TGf is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as a reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGf is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. Further, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGf is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, the opening effect executed before the first variation game in the second advantageous effect state is started is referred to as the fourth opening effect. In the fourth opening effect, the heart movable body 25 operates. Since the attention image TGf is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25, even when the heart movable body 25 moves in front view, the heart movable body 25 becomes the attention image TGf. Does not suffer.

In the fourth opening effect, the image OP4 is displayed on the effect display device 14. The image OP4 shows “The second advantageous effect state has entered! Is an image including the characters (character information). The image OP4 displayed when the fourth opening effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started, a specific image (for example, image OP4) displayed before the first variation game is started. ) Is not displayed and continues to be displayed, and the operation of the specific image is stopped. That is, in this embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the specific state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the specific state is started is displayed. It continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image is stagnated.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears when the fourth opening effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image C imitating the third character.
H3 is displayed. At this time, on the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed behind the attention image TGf. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when the attention-related attention is executed.

Hereinafter, control related to various opening effects will be described.
First, the control related to the first opening effect will be described.
When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGa is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S302 of the special stagnation process, the first stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. After the execution of the stagnation control is started, a reminder about the depression is executed. When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP1 is displayed.

When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. In the second embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect under the determination probability shown in FIG. 19A, as in the first embodiment. Note that the sub-control CPU 41a also determines the effect contents of the appearance effect when the second opening effect to the fourth opening effect described below are executed, as in the case where the first opening effect is executed. To do. When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control. Similar to the first embodiment, in the special visual recognition control, the sub control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL so that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed at least in the transparent area 14a of the effect display device 14.

When the first opening effect is executed, that is, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGa and then starts the measurement of the specific time. When the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGa at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to control. In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the measurement of the specific time to the passage of the specific time corresponds to the specific period. Then, in the present embodiment, the execution period in which the stagnation control including the opening time measured in step S303 is executed is a specific time, that is, shorter than the specific period.

In addition, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to finish the first opening effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, the display of the image OP1 and the image related to the appearance effect (for example, the image CH3) ends, but the attention image TGa continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, a special time period (within a specific time period) from the start of the execution of the alerting regarding the slip-in before the first game in the special state is started (within the specific period), When the first game in the state is started, the alerting regarding the depression is continued to be executed. When the variable game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGa to end when the variable game start command is input. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the special state is started after the specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is started before the first game in the special state is started, Execution of the alert regarding the entanglement ends. Incidentally, even if the bet number is set before or after the lapse of the specific period from the start of the measurement of the specific time, the first opening effect continues to be executed without ending, Reminders regarding entanglement continue to be implemented.

When the settlement command is input during execution of the first opening effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first opening effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGa is also ended. Even when the adjustment command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the caution image to be displayed when the first opening effect is finished. The display of TGa is also ended. Similarly to the first embodiment, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of a warning regarding returning the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed. Furthermore, when the waiting time elapses without the bet number being set thereafter, the effect display device 14 executes the waiting effect, and calls attention to the devotion during the execution of the waiting effect.

Next, the control related to the second opening effect will be described.
When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGc is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S306 of the special stagnation process, the second stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. After the execution of the stagnation control is started, a reminder about the depression is executed. When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP2 is displayed. When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control.

Further, when the second opening effect is executed, that is, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGc and then starts the measurement of the specific time. When the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGc at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so that In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the measurement of the specific time to the passage of the specific time corresponds to the specific period. Then, in the present embodiment, the execution period in which the stagnation control including the opening time measured in step S307 is executed is a specific time, that is, shorter than the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time has started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the second opening effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, although the display of the image OP2 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, the attention image TGc continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, a special time period (within a specific time period) from the start of the execution of the alerting regarding the slip-in before the first game in the special state is started (within the specific period), When the first game in the state is started, the alerting regarding the depression is continued to be executed. When the variable game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGc to end with the input of the variable game start command. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the special state is started after the specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is started before the first game in the special state is started, Execution of the alert regarding the entanglement ends. Incidentally, regardless of whether the bet number is set before or after the specific period has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the second opening effect continues to be executed without ending, Reminders regarding entanglement continue to be implemented.

Moreover, when the settlement command is input during execution of the second opening effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second opening effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGc is also ended. Even when the adjustment command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the caution image to be displayed when ending the second opening effect. The display of TGc is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed. Furthermore, when the waiting time elapses without the bet number being set thereafter, the effect display device 14 executes the waiting effect, and calls attention to the devotion during the execution of the waiting effect.

Next, the control relating to the third opening effect will be described.
When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGe is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S310 of the special stagnation process, the non-special third stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the depression is executed.

When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP3 is displayed. When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. To do. When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control.

When the third opening effect is executed, that is, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGe and then starts the measurement of the specific time. When the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGe at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to control. In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the measurement of the specific time to the passage of the specific time corresponds to the specific period. Then, in the present embodiment, the execution period in which the stagnation control including the opening time measured in step S311 is executed is a specific time, that is, shorter than the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to finish the third opening effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, although the display of the image OP3 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, the attention image TGe continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the identification is performed during a specific time period (within a specific period) after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is started before the first game in the specific state is started. When the first game in the state is started, the alerting regarding the depression is continued to be executed. When the variable game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the input of the variable game start command to terminate the display of the attention image TGe so that the effect display device is displayed. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the specific state is started after the specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is started before the first game in the specific state is started, Execution of the alert for entanglement ends.

When the settlement command is input during execution of the third opening effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third opening effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGe is also ended. Even when the adjustment command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the caution image to be displayed when ending the third opening effect. The display of TGe is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed. However, the third opening effect is executed when the winning of the promotion replay combination is used as a trigger to control the first advantageous effect state. Therefore, when the third opening effect is executed, since the re-game is being given, the caution regarding the adjustment effect and the return of the storage medium is executed on condition that the adjustment button 19 is operated. After that, the standby effect is not executed even if the standby time elapses.

Next, the control related to the fourth opening effect will be described.
When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth opening effect is executed. Specifically, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGf is displayed. In the present embodiment, in step S310 of the special stagnation process, after the main control CPU 40a stores the special third stagnation start command in the output buffer, the special third stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the depression is executed.

When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP4 is displayed. When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. .. When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control. In addition, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 to operate the heart movable body 25.

When the fourth opening effect is executed, that is, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGf and then starts measuring the specific time. When the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGf at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to control. In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the measurement of the specific time to the passage of the specific time corresponds to the specific period. Then, in the present embodiment, the execution period in which the stagnation control including the opening time measured in step S311 is executed is a specific time, that is, shorter than the specific period.

When the variable game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the fourth opening effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, although the display of the image OP4 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, the attention image TGf continues to be displayed. At this time, the heart movable body 25 operates to the origin 25a and returns to the origin 25a. As described above, in the present embodiment, the identification is performed during a specific time period (within a specific period) after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is started before the first game in the specific state is started. When the first game in the state is started, the alerting regarding the depression is continued to be executed. When the variable game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGf to end when the variable game start command is input. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the specific state is started after the specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is started before the first game in the specific state is started, Execution of the alert for entanglement ends.

When the settlement command is input during execution of the fourth opening effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth opening effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGf is also ended. Even when the adjustment command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the caution image to be displayed when ending the fourth opening effect. The display of TGf is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed. However, the fourth opening effect is executed when the winning of the promotion re-game combination is used as a trigger to control the second advantageous effect state. Therefore, when the fourth opening effect is executed, since the re-game is being given, the caution regarding the adjustment effect and the return of the storage medium is executed on condition that the adjustment button 19 is operated. After that, the standby effect is not executed even if the standby time elapses.

Here, the alerting regarding the inset that is executed in the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to execute a warning (shown in FIG. 15(d)) relating to the indentation executed by displaying the warning image GT3. In addition, the slot machine 10 is related to the alerting (shown in FIG. 28A) regarding the intrusion performed by displaying the alerting image TGa and the inrushing performed by displaying the alerting image TGc. It is configured to be able to execute a warning (shown in FIG. 28B). In addition, the slot machine 10 is related to the alerting (shown in FIG. 28C) regarding the intrusion performed by displaying the alerting image TGe, and the indentation performed by displaying the alerting image TGf. It is configured to be able to execute a warning (shown in FIG. 28D). Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the inset that is performed by displaying the alerting image GT3 corresponds to the alert regarding the inset that is performed during the execution of the standby effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the inset that is executed by displaying the alerting image TGa is a note regarding the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the first bonus game state is started. Equivalent to arousal. Further, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the inset that is executed by displaying the alerting image TGc is a note regarding the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the second bonus game state is started. Equivalent to arousal. In addition, in the present embodiment, the alerting attention performed by displaying the alerting image TGe and the alerting engagement performed by displaying the alerting image TGf are in the advantageous effect state. This is equivalent to calling attention to the infiltration that is executed before the first floating game is started.

The warning images GT3, TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf all show that "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. The character (character information) and "Let's be careful not to get caught. And the character (character information). In other words, the content of the alert regarding the indulgence executed during the execution of the standby effect and before the first variable game in the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state and the advantageous effect state is started, "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. It is the content that displays the character. In addition, the contents of the caution regarding the indulgence executed during the execution of the standby effect and before the first variable game in the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state and the advantageous effect state is started, "Let's be careful not to get caught. It is the content that displays the character.

As described above, the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the bonus game is started. In other words, the content of the caution regarding the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the bonus game is started is the same as the content of the intent that is executed during the execution of the standby effect. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, when a single bonus game is generated among the bonus games, the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed. In the present embodiment, the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed before the first variable game in the specific bonus game is started. It can be said that there is.

In addition, the content of the caution regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the caution regarding the inrush that is executed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started is the same as the content of the alert regarding the intent that is executed during the execution of the standby effect. In addition, the content of the caution regarding the entanglement executed before the first variable game in the bonus game state is started relates to the entanglement executed before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started. It is the same as the content of the alert. In other words, the content of the caution regarding the inset that is executed before the first fluctuating game in the advantageous effect state is started is It is the same as the content of the alert regarding.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, it is executed during the execution of the standby effect and before the first variable game in the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state and the advantageous effect state is started. The contents of the alert regarding the intrusion are common and the same. On the other hand, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is different in the manner of calling attention to the intrusion.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15D and FIG. 28A to FIG. 28D, the position where the caution image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 is the caution image on the effect display device 14. It is different from the position where TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed. Further, the size of the attention image GT3 displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention image TGa, TGc, TGe, TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of characters (character information) included in the attention image GT3 is different from the typeface of characters (character information) included in the attention image TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf. Further, the color of characters included in the attention image GT3 (so-called character color) is different from the color of characters included in the attention image TGa, TGc, TGe, TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert image GT3 is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf.

Similar to the first embodiment, regarding the image displayed when the attention is paid to the intrusion, the position to be displayed, the size, the display area to be displayed, the typeface of the characters included in the image, and the image included in the image. If at least one of the color of the characters and the size of the characters included in the image is different, it can be said that the manner of calling attention to the intrusion is different.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of alerting that is performed during the execution of the standby effect is the alerting that is performed before the first variable game in the bonus game state is started. Different from the embodiment. In other words, the manner of alerting the player who is engaged before the first variation game in the bonus game state is started is different from the manner of alerting that the player is engaged during the standby effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the alerting aspect regarding the inset that is executed during execution of the standby effect is the alerting aspect regarding the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started. different. In other words, the manner of alerting for the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started is different from the alerting aspect for the intent that is executed during the execution of the standby effect.

As shown in FIGS. 28(a) to 28(d), the positions at which the attention display images TGa, TGc are displayed on the effect display device 14 are the positions at which the attention display images TGe, TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. Different from Further, the size of the alerting images TGa, TGc displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alerting images TGe, TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention display images TGa and TGc are displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention display images TGe and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the typeface of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of calling attention to the intrusion that is executed before the first fluctuating game in the advantageous effect state is started is more than that when the first fluctuating game in the bonus game state is started. Is also different from the manner of alerting for the invading that is executed before. In other words, the mode of alerting regarding the inset that is executed before the first variable game in the bonus game state is started is that the inline executed before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started. Is different from the mode of alerting regarding. As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of alerting about the entanglement executed before the first game in the specific state is started is executed before the first game in the special state is started. It is different from the form of alerting about run-in.

As shown in FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b), the position where the attention image TGA is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the attention image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the size of the alert image TGa displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alert image TGc displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGa is different from the typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGc. In addition, the color of the character included in the attention image TGa is different from the color of the character included in the attention image TGc. In addition, the size of the character included in the attention image TGa is different from the size of the character included in the attention image TGc.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first variation game in the second bonus game state is executed in the first bonus game state before the first variation game is started. This is different from the mode of alerting for the engagement that is executed before the start. In other words, the manner of alerting about the entanglement executed before the first fluctuating game in the second bonus game state is started before the first fluctuating game in the first bonus game state is started. This is different from the form of alerting about being entangled. In the present embodiment, the first bonus stop eye corresponds to the first special display result, and the first bonus game state corresponds to the first special state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second bonus stop eye corresponds to the second special display result, and the second bonus game state corresponds to the second special state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the manner of calling attention to the slip-in performed after the execution of the stagnation control is started before the first game is started in the first special state is the first time in the second special state. This is different from the alerting mode regarding the intrusion that is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started before the game is started.

As shown in FIG. 28( c) and FIG. 28( d ), the position at which the attention display image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position at which the attention display image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the size of the attention image TGe displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention image TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGe is different from the typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGf. Further, the color of the character included in the alert image TGe is different from the color of the character included in the alert image TGf. In addition, the size of the character included in the attention image TGe is different from the size of the character included in the attention image TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of calling attention to the infiltration that is executed before the first variation game in the first advantageous effect state is started is that the first variation game in the second advantageous effect state is This is different from the mode of alerting for the engagement that is executed before it is started. In other words, the manner of alerting about the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the second advantageous effect state is started is before the first variation game in the first advantageous effect state is started. This is different from the form of alerting about being entangled. That is, in the present embodiment, the first advantageous effect state corresponds to the first effect specific state, and the second advantageous effect state corresponds to the second effect specific state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the alert regarding the slip-in performed after the execution of the stagnation control is started before the first game is started in the first effect specific state is in the second effect specific state. This is different from the manner of calling attention to the slip-in that is performed after the execution of the stagnation control is started before the first game is started.

Next, based on FIGS. 29(a) to 29(c), a case where the first bonus combination is won and the first bonus game state is generated, and a single bonus combination is won and the single bonus game state is generated. The case of being performed and the case of being promoted and playing a game combination and being controlled to the first advantageous effect state will be described.

As shown in FIG. 29A, when the first bonus combination is won in the variable game, the first bonus game state is generated, but the first variable game in the first bonus game state is started. Execution of the stagnation control is started at a timing t31 earlier than that. In the stagnation control started at timing t31, a predetermined opening time measurement process is performed, and the stagnation control is continued for at least the opening time. Further, when the execution of the stagnation control is started at the timing t31, the first opening effect is executed. At this time, the attention display image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention display is executed. It is also assumed that the bet button 18 is operated and the start lever 20 is operated at a timing t32 before the opening time elapses after the stagnation control is started. At timing t32, since the stagnation control is being executed, it is not possible to set the bet number or start the variable game.

If the start lever 20 is operated after the bet number is set at the timing t33 after the opening time has elapsed from the timing t31 and before the specific time has elapsed from the timing t31, the first bonus game The first variation game in the state is started, and the execution of the first opening effect is completed. At this time, the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the first bonus effect state. However, from the timing t31 to the timing t34 when the specific time elapses, the attention display image TGa continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the slip-in continues to be executed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated after the bet number is set at the timing t35 after the opening time has passed from the timing t31 and after the specific time has passed from the timing t31, the first bonus The first variation game in the gaming state is started, and the execution of the first opening effect is completed. At this time, the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the first bonus effect state. In addition, with the completion of the execution of the first opening effect, the display of the attention image TGa is also terminated, and the attention regarding the intrusion is finished.

By the way, if the waiting time elapses without setting the bet number even after the specific time elapses from the timing t31, the execution of the standby effect is started. Then, while the standby effect is being executed, the attention image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed. In this case, since the first opening effect continues to be executed until the waiting time elapses, the caution display image TGa continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 and the caution regarding the slip-in continues to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), when a single bonus combination is won in the variable game executed while being controlled to the normal effect state, it is controlled to the single bonus game state, but as the effect state, the normal effect state. Is continuously controlled. The opening effect is not executed before the variable game in the single bonus game state is started. Further, the stagnation control is not executed before the variation game in the single bonus game state is started. Further, before the variation game in the single bonus game state is started, the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed.

As shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, in the slot machine 10, the stagnation control is executed before the first variable game in the first bonus game state is started, while the single bonus game is executed. The stagnation control is not executed before the fluctuation game in the state is started. Further, in the slot machine 10, the alert regarding the intrusion is executed before the first variation game in the first bonus game state is started, while before the variation game in the single bonus game state is started. The warning about being stuck is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 29C, when the promotion re-playing combination is won in the variable game and is controlled to the first advantageous effect state, the first variable game in the first advantageous effect state is started rather than being started. Execution of the stagnation control is started at the previous timing t41. In addition, when the promotion replay is won, the replay is given and the bet number is set.

In the stagnation control started at the timing t41, a predetermined opening time measurement process is performed, and the stagnation control is continued for at least the opening time. Further, when the execution of the stagnation control is started at the timing t41, the third opening effect is executed. At this time, the attention display image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention display is executed. It is also assumed that the start lever 20 is operated at the timing t42 before the opening time elapses after the stagnation control is started. At timing t42, the fluctuation game cannot be started because the stagnation control is being executed.

If the start lever 20 is operated at the timing t43 after the opening time has elapsed from the timing t41 and before the specific time has elapsed from the timing t41, the first variation game in the first advantageous effect state is It starts and the execution of the third opening effect ends. At this time, the background image in the first advantageous effect state is displayed on the effect display device 14. However, from the timing t41 to the timing t44 when the specific time elapses, the attention display image TGe continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the slip-in continues to be executed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated at the timing t45 after the opening time has passed from the timing t41 and after the specific time has passed from the timing t41, the first variation game in the first advantageous effect state. Is started, and the execution of the third opening effect ends. At this time, the background image in the first advantageous effect state is displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, with the completion of the execution of the third opening effect, the display of the attention image TGe is also terminated, and the attention regarding the intrusion is finished. By the way, even if the waiting time elapses after the specific time elapses from the timing t41, the standby game is not executed because the re-game is given.

According to the second embodiment, in addition to the effects (5), (14), (15), (23), (25) to (39) and (49) to (53) of the first embodiment, It has such an effect.
(56) The stagnation control is executed before the first variable game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) that occurs after the bonus stop eye (special display result) is derived, and the stagnation is performed. After the control is started to be executed, a warning regarding the entanglement is executed. In this way, by performing the stagnation control to temporarily suspend the play before the first variation game in the bonus game state is started, and by performing the alert for the intrusion, the alert for the intrusion Can be effectively executed. By the way, when a bonus game state occurs, it is highly likely that the player's interest is toward the bonus game state and lacks calmness. In this way, in situations where it is highly likely that the player lacks composure, after performing a stagnation control to temporarily suspend play, a reminder about sneaking in is executed by executing a reminder about sneaking in. It can be executed more effectively.

(57) A mode of calling attention to the entanglement executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started before the first variation game (game) in the first bonus game state, and in the second bonus game state The mode of calling attention to the slip-in that is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started before the first fluctuation game is started is different. As a result, it is possible to understand which of the first bonus game state (first special state) and the second bonus game state (second special state) is generated from the manner of calling attention to the devotion. .. As a result, it is possible to raise the attention to the alerting regarding the intrusion, and it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the intrusion.

(58) When the stagnation control is executed before the first variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) is started, it is displayed before the first game in the bonus game state is started. The specified specific image (for example, the image OP1 and the image OP2) continues to be displayed without being operated, and the operation of the specific image is delayed. For example, if a specific image moves while an attention-giving attention is being executed, the player's interest may shift to the specific image, but the specific image continues to be displayed without being operated. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in calling attention to the intrusion.

(59) The stagnation control is executed before the first fluctuating game (game) is started in the advantageous effect state (specific state) in which the Bellnavi effect as the guide effect for guiding the operation for obtaining the profit is executed. The warning regarding the intrusion after the execution of the stagnation control is started is executed. In this way, by performing the stagnation control and temporarily interrupting the play before the first game in the advantageous effect state is started, the attention regarding the intrusion is executed by executing the alert for the intrusion. It can be executed effectively. By the way, when the advantageous effect state is generated, the player's interest is likely to shift to the advantageous effect state and lack calmness. In this way, in situations where it is highly likely that the player lacks composure, after performing a stagnation control to temporarily suspend play, a reminder about sneaking in is executed by executing a reminder about sneaking in. It can be executed more effectively.

(60) A mode of calling attention to inset that is executed after execution of stagnation control is started before the first variation game (game) in the first advantageous effect state, and in the second advantageous effect state The mode of calling attention to the slip-in that is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started before the first fluctuation game is started is different. As a result, it is possible to understand which of the first advantageous effect state (first effect specific state) and the second advantageous effect state (second effect specific state) will occur from the aspect of the alert regarding the devotion. Becomes As a result, it is possible to raise the attention to the alerting regarding the intrusion, and it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the intrusion.

(61) When the stagnation control is executed before the first variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) is started, it is displayed before the first game in the advantageous effect state is started. The specified specific image (for example, the image OP3 or the image OP4) continues to be displayed without being operated, and the operation of the specific image is delayed. For example, if a specific image moves while a warning about being stuck in is being executed, the player's interest may shift to the specific image, but the specific image continues to be displayed without being operated. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in calling attention to the intrusion.

(62) When the first fluctuating game in the bonus game state (special state) is started within the specific period, the alerting regarding the slip-in continues to be executed without ending. For this reason, it is possible to execute the alert for the intrusion at least within a specific period after the execution of the alert for the intrusion before the first variation game in the bonus game state is started, and the intrusion notice The arousal can be executed effectively. In addition, when the first variable game in the bonus game state is started after a specific period of time after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is started before the first variable game in the bonus game state is started, the variable game is Until it is started, alerts regarding engulfing will continue to be executed. Therefore, even before the first fluctuating game in the bonus game state is not started within the specific period before the first fluctuating game is started, until the first fluctuating game is started after the specific period. It is possible to execute a reminder regarding the intrusion and effectively execute a reminder regarding the intrusion.

(63) By performing the stagnation control to temporarily alert the player after the play is temporarily stalled, the attention to the entanglement is easily noticed. Further, the specific period is set to be longer than the execution period in which the stagnation control is executed before the first variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) is started. As a result, for example, if a player who is less interested in alerting to entanglement is within a specific period even if he/she executes the first variable game in the bonus game state immediately after the stagnation control ends, alerting to entanglement is issued. Keeps running without exiting. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the fact that the alerting regarding the intrusion is not completed, and it is possible to raise the interest in the alerting regarding the intrusion. As a result, it is possible to effectively carry out the alerting for the player's entanglement to the player who is not interested in the alerting for the entanglement.

(64) When the first fluctuating game in the advantageous effect state (specific state) is started within the specific period, the alerting regarding the slip-in continues to be executed without ending. For this reason, it is possible to execute the alerting for the intrusion at least within a specific period after the alerting for the intrusion is started before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started. The arousal can be executed effectively. Further, when the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started after a specific period of time after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is started before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started, the variable game is Until it is started, alerts regarding engulfing will continue to be executed. Therefore, even before the first fluctuating game in the advantageous effect state is not started within the specific period before the first fluctuating game is started, until the first fluctuating game is started after the specific period. It is possible to execute a reminder regarding the intrusion and effectively execute a reminder regarding the intrusion.

(65) By performing the stagnation control to temporarily alert the player after the play is temporarily stalled, it becomes easier to draw attention to the alert to the entanglement. In addition, the specific period is set to be longer than the execution period in which the stagnation control is executed before the first variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) is started. As a result, for example, if a player who has little interest in alerting to sneaking in is allowed to execute the first fluctuating game in the advantageous effect state immediately after the end of stagnation control, etc. Keeps running without exiting. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the fact that the alerting regarding the intrusion is not completed, and it is possible to raise the interest in the alerting regarding the intrusion. As a result, it is possible to effectively carry out the alerting for the player's entanglement to the player who is not interested in the alerting for the entanglement.

(66) Content of alerting about running-in performed during execution of standby production and alerting about running-in performed before the first variable game (game) in the bonus game state (special state) is started If the contents are different, there is a risk of misidentification such as alerting different events. However, the content of the alert regarding the indulgence that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the inrush that is executed before the first variation game in the bonus game state is started. As a result, it is possible to perform a common alerting regarding the intrusion, and it is possible to suppress misidentification of the alerting.

(67) The content of the alert regarding the entanglement executed during the execution of the standby effect and the alert regarding the entanglement executed before the first variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) is started. If the contents are different, there is a risk of misidentification such as alerting different events. However, the content of the caution regarding the indulgence executed during the execution of the standby effect and the content of the caution regarding the inrush effect executed before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started are the same. As a result, it is possible to perform a common alerting regarding the intrusion, and it is possible to suppress misidentification of the alerting.

(68) The content of the caution regarding the entanglement executed before the first fluctuating game in the advantageous effect state is started before the first fluctuating game in the standby effect execution or the bonus game state is started. When the contents of the alerting regarding the intrusion that is executed before are different, there is a possibility that misidentification such as alerting different events may occur. However, the content of the caution regarding the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started, The contents are the same as the content of the warning regarding the invading that is executed before the floating game is started. As a result, it is possible to perform a common alerting regarding the intrusion, and it is possible to suppress misidentification of the alerting.

(69) The manner of alerting about the inset that is executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the manner of alerting about the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the bonus game state is started. As a result, depending on the situation during the execution of the standby effect and prior to the start of the first variation game in the bonus game state, it is possible to effectively execute a caution regarding depression and suppress the depression. it can.

(70) An alerting mode regarding indentation performed during execution of the standby effect is different from an alerting mode regarding intrusion that is executed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started. As a result, while the standby effect is being executed, and according to each situation prior to the start of the first variation game in the advantageous effect state, it is possible to effectively execute a reminder regarding the intrusion and suppress the intrusion. it can.

(71) The manner of alerting the indulgence that is executed before the first variable game in the bonus game state is started is that the inset that is executed before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started. This is different from the form of alerting regarding. As a result, in accordance with each situation before the first variable game in the bonus game state is started and before the first variable game in the advantageous effect state is started, the alert regarding the effective engagement is called out. Can be carried out to suppress the depression.

(Third Embodiment)
Next, a third embodiment of the gaming machine will be described. The same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description and drawings thereof are omitted.

In the first embodiment, the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the stagnation control is executed in the bonus game state (in the middle of the bonus game state), and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the intrusion is executed. Further, in the first embodiment, the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the caution regarding the intrusion is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the stagnation control is executed in the advantageous effect state (in the middle of the advantageous effect state), and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the caution regarding the intrusion is executed.

In the third embodiment, the stagnation control is executed when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied during the first bonus game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, the 10th variation game is executed in the first bonus game state, whereby a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the third embodiment, the tenth variation game is executed after the tenth variation game is executed in the first bonus game state, and the tenth variation game is executed in the first bonus game state. The stagnation control is executed later. The main control CPU 40a performs a counting process of counting the number of times of a variable game executed after being controlled to the first bonus game state or the first bonus effect state, and the first bonus game is obtained from the counting result of the counting process. It is possible to specify the number of variable games executed in the state or the first bonus effect state.

Further, in the third embodiment, the stagnation control is executed when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied during the second bonus game state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, the fifth variable game is executed in the second bonus game state, so that a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. Therefore, in the third embodiment, after the fifth variation game is executed in the second bonus game state, it is in the middle of the second bonus game state, and the fifth variation game is executed in the second bonus game state. The stagnation control is executed later. In addition, the main control CPU 40a performs a counting process for counting the number of variable games executed after being controlled to the second bonus game state or the second bonus effect state, and the second bonus game is obtained from the counting result in the counting process. It is possible to specify the number of variable games executed in the state or the second bonus effect state.

In the third embodiment, the stagnation control is executed when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied during the advantageous effect state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, the predetermined execution condition is satisfied by executing the tenth variation game in the advantageous effect state. Therefore, in the third embodiment, after the tenth variation game is executed in the advantageous effect state, the intermediate effect state is in the middle, and the stagnation control is performed after the tenth variation game is executed in the advantageous effect state. It In addition, the main control CPU 40a performs a counting process for counting the number of variable games executed after being controlled to the advantageous effect state, and determines the number of variable games executed in the advantageous effect state from the counting result in the counting process. It is identifiable.

Here, the special stagnation process in the third embodiment will be described based on FIG.
In the specific stagnation process of the third embodiment, the main control CPU 40a determines whether it is in the middle of the first bonus effect state (step S401). In step S401, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the tenth variation game has ended since the first bonus effect state was reached. That is, in step S401, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not a predetermined execution condition that is satisfied during the first bonus game state is satisfied. It is determined in step S401 that the tenth variation game has ended after the first bonus effect state has been reached, which is equivalent to being determined to be in the middle of the first bonus game state. When the first bonus effect state is in the middle (step S401: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the first stagnation start command (step S402). In the output process of the first stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer. Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs an interval time measurement process (step S403). In step S403, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined interval time and waits until the interval time elapses. When the interval time elapses and the interval time measurement process ends, the main control CPU 40a performs the first stagnation end command output process (step S404), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the first stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation end command in the output buffer.

When it is not in the middle of the first bonus effect state (step S401: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether it is in the middle of the second bonus effect state (step S405). In step S405, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the fifth variation game has ended after the second bonus effect state is reached. That is, in step S405, the main control CPU 40a determines whether a predetermined execution condition that is satisfied during the second bonus game state is satisfied. It is determined in step S405 that the fifth variable game has ended after the second bonus effect state is reached, which means that it is determined that the second bonus game state is in the middle. If the second bonus effect state is in the middle (step S405: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the second stagnation start command (step S406). In the output process of the second stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer. Then, the main control CPU 40a performs an interval time measurement process (step S407). In step S407, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined interval time and waits until the interval time elapses. When the interval time elapses and the interval time measurement process ends, the main control CPU 40a performs a second stagnation end command output process (step S408), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the second stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation end command in the output buffer.

When it is not in the middle of the second bonus effect state (step S405: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether it is in the middle of the advantageous effect state (step S409). In step S409, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the tenth variation game has ended after the advantageous effect state is reached. That is, in step S409, the main control CPU 40a determines whether a predetermined execution condition that is satisfied during the advantageous effect state is satisfied. In step S409, it is determined that the tenth variation game has ended after the advantageous effect state has been reached, which corresponds to determination that the advantageous effect state is in the middle. When it is not in the middle of the advantageous effect state (step S409: NO), the main control CPU 40a ends the special stagnation process. On the other hand, when it is in the middle of the advantageous effect state (step S409: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the third stagnation start command (step S410). In the output process of the third stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation start command in the output buffer. The third stagnation start command includes a special third stagnation start command and a non-special third stagnation start command. Then, in the advantageous effect state, in the second advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a stores the special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S410. On the other hand, if it is the first advantageous effect state among the advantageous effect states, the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S410.

Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs an interval time measurement process (step S411). In step S411, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined interval time and waits until the interval time elapses. When the interval time elapses and the interval time measurement process ends, the main control CPU 40a performs a third stagnation end command output process (step S412), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the third stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation end command in the output buffer.

In the present embodiment, the processing of steps S402 to S404, the processing of steps S406 to S408, and the processing of steps S410 to S412 correspond to stagnation control. In the following description, the processes of steps S402 to S404 are performed, the processes of steps S406 to S408 are performed, and the processes of steps S410 to S412 are performed, respectively. May be done." In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs any one of the processing of steps S402 to S404, the processing of steps S406 to S408, and the processing of steps S410 to S412 to execute the stagnation control. The function as a control means is realized. In addition, in the present embodiment, among the processing of steps S402 to S404, the processing of steps S406 to S408, and the processing of steps S410 to S412, the processing of steps S403, S407, and S411 has a predetermined interval time. Measurement control, that is, measurement control for a predetermined interval time is performed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the processing of steps S402 to S404 and the processing of steps S406 to S408 are performed when the bonus game state corresponding to the special state is performed, so that the stagnation control is performed when the special state is set. You can see that it will be executed. Similarly, in the present embodiment, since the processing of steps S410 to S412 is performed in the advantageous effect state corresponding to the specific state, it can be seen that the stagnation control is executed in the specific state.

In the slot machine 10 of the third embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed, the effect display device 14 executes the interval effect. In the slot machine 10, the appearance display may be executed on the effect display device 14 while the interval effect is being executed.

Next, various interval effects will be described.
It should be noted that the main control CPU 40a performs the processing of steps S402 to S404 of the special stagnation process, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the interval effect in the first bonus effect state. It Moreover, after the processing of steps S404 to S406 of the special stagnation process is performed by the main control CPU 40a and the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the interval effect in the second bonus effect state. It In addition, after the main control CPU 40a performs the processes of steps S410 to S412 of the special stagnation process to start execution of the stagnation control, the effect display device 14 executes the interval effect in the advantageous effect state.

As shown in FIG. 31A, when the game is in the first bonus game state (during the first bonus game state), a caution image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 and a caution about the intrusion is executed. It In other words, the warning about the inset that is executed in the first bonus game state is "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] Is the content to display the character. In addition, as for the warning regarding the intrusion that is executed when the game is in the first bonus game state, "Be careful of intrusion. It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the width of the attention image TGa corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the attention image TGa is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGa is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. The display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGa is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, the interval effect executed in the first bonus game state is referred to as the first interval effect. In the first interval effect, the effect display device 14 displays the image IN1. Image IN1 says, "Get a lot of medals! Is an image including the characters (character information). The image IN1 displayed when the first interval effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, the image IN1) displayed in the bonus game state continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image. Operation is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed in the special state, the specific image displayed in the special state continues to be displayed without operation, and the operation of the specific image is stale. To be done.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears when the first interval effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays the image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the attention image TGa. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when the attention-related attention is executed.

As shown in FIG. 31B, when the game is in the second bonus game state (during the second bonus game state), a caution image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a caution about the intrusion is executed. It In other words, the warning about the sneaking in that is executed in the second bonus game state is that "pachinko/pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game. ] Is the content to display the character. In addition, as for the warning regarding the intrusion that is executed in the second bonus game state, "Be careful of intrusion. It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, the horizontal width of the attention image TGc corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the horizontal width of one reel in the front view.

Further, the attention image TGc is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as a reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGc is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. The display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGc is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, the interval effect executed in the second bonus game state is referred to as the second interval effect. In the second interval effect, the image IN2 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image IN2 says, "There's still more! Is an image including the characters (character information). The image IN2 that is displayed when the second interval effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed in the bonus game state, the specific image (for example, the image IN2) displayed in the bonus game state continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image. Operation is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed in the special state, the specific image displayed in the special state continues to be displayed without operation, and the operation of the specific image is stale. To be done.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the first character appears when the second interval effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH1 simulating the first character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed behind the attention image TGc. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when the attention-related attention is executed.

As shown in FIG. 31(c), when in the first advantageous effect state (during the first advantageous effect state), the effect display device 14 displays the caution image TGe, and the caution message regarding the intrusion is executed. It In other words, the warning about the indulgence that is executed in the first advantageous production state is, "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] Is the content to display the character. Also, as for the caution regarding indentation that is executed in the first advantageous production state, "Let's be careful in inset". It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the attention image TGe corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the width of one reel.

The attention image TGe is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as a reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGe is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. The display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGe is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, the interval effect executed in the first advantageous effect state is referred to as a third interval effect. In the third interval effect, the image IN3 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image IN3 says, "The game is going to start! Is an image including the characters (character information). The image IN3 displayed when the third interval effect is executed continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 without operating. That is, when the stagnation control is executed in the advantageous effect state, the specific image (for example, the image IN3) displayed in the advantageous effect state continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image. Operation is stalled. That is, in this embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the specific state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the specific state is started is displayed. It continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image is stagnated.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the second character appears when the third interval effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH2 imitating the second character. At this time, on the effect display device 14, the image CH2 is displayed behind the attention image TGe. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when the attention-related attention is executed.

As shown in FIG. 31D, when in the first advantageous effect state (during the first advantageous effect state), a caution image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14 to call attention to the intrusion. It In other words, the warning about the indulgence that is executed in the second advantageous production state is "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. ] Is the content to display the character. Also, as for the caution regarding the depression, which is executed in the second advantageous effect state, "Let's be careful of the depression. It is the content that displays the characters. In the slot machine 10, when viewed from the front, the width of the attention image TGf corresponding to the predetermined attention image is longer than the width of one reel.

The attention image TGf is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transparent area 14a. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed is different from the transparent area 14a as a reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the production display device 14 of the transmissive display. This is the display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, in the display area of the transmissive display, which is different from the reel visual recognition area, the caution image TGf is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. Further, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed corresponds to the predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the attention image TGf is displayed in the predetermined effect area, so that the attention regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area is executed. As described above, the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed is a display area different from the transparent area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body. It is an area that does not overlap with.

In the following description, the interval effect executed in the second advantageous effect state is referred to as a fourth interval effect. In the fourth interval effect, the heart movable body 25 operates. Since the attention image TGf is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25, even when the heart movable body 25 moves in front view, the heart movable body 25 becomes the attention image TGf. Does not suffer.

In the fourth interval effect, the image IN4 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image IN4 shows "At the time of the game! Is an image including the characters (character information). The image IN4 displayed when the fourth interval effect is executed is not displayed on the effect display device 14 and continues to be displayed. That is, when the stagnation control is executed in the advantageous effect state, the specific image (for example, the image IN4) displayed in the advantageous effect state continues to be displayed without operating, and the specific image. Operation is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed in the specific state, the specific image displayed in the specific state continues to be displayed without operation, and the operation of the specific image is stale. To be done.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears when the fourth interval effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, on the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed behind the attention image TGf. As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is executed when the attention-related attention is executed.

Hereinafter, control related to various interval effects will be described.
First, the control related to the first interval effect will be described.
When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGa is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S402 of the special stagnation process, the first stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. After the execution of the stagnation control is started, a reminder about the depression is executed. When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN1 is displayed.

When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. In the third embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect under the determination probability shown in FIG. 19A, as in the first embodiment. The sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect when the second interval effect to the fourth interval effect described below are executed as well as when the first interval effect is executed. To do. When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control. Similar to the first embodiment, in the special visual recognition control, the sub control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL so that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed at least in the transparent area 14a of the effect display device 14.

When executing the first interval effect, that is, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measuring the specific time after displaying the attention image TGa. When the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGa at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to control. In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the measurement of the specific time to the passage of the specific time corresponds to the specific period. Then, in the present embodiment, the execution period in which the stagnation control including the interval time measured in step S403 is executed is a specific time, that is, shorter than the specific period.

When the variable game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to finish the first interval effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, the display of the image IN1 and the image related to the appearance effect (for example, the image CH3) ends, but the attention image TGa continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started during the specific time period (within the specific period) after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion in the special state is started, Reminders regarding entanglement will continue to be implemented. When the variable game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGa to end when the variable game start command is input. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started after the specific period from the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion in the special state, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended. Incidentally, regardless of whether the bet number is set before or after the specific time period has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time period, the first interval effect continues to be executed without ending, Reminders regarding entanglement continue to be implemented.

When the settlement command is input during execution of the first interval effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first interval effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGa is also ended. Even when the adjustment command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time was started, the sub-control CPU 41a calls the attention image when ending the first interval effect. The display of TGa is also ended. Similarly to the first embodiment, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of a warning regarding returning the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed. Further, when the waiting time elapses without the bet number being set thereafter, if the replay is not given, the effect display device 14 executes the waiting effect, and is absorbed during the execution of the waiting effect. Warning is executed.

Next, the control related to the second interval effect will be described.
When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGc is displayed. In the present embodiment, since the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S406 of the special stagnation process, the second stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. After the execution of the stagnation control is started, a reminder about the depression is executed. When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN2 is displayed. When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control.

When the second interval effect is executed, that is, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGc and then starts measuring the specific time. When the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGc at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so that In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the measurement of the specific time to the passage of the specific time corresponds to the specific period. Then, in the present embodiment, the execution period in which the stagnation control including the interval time measured in step S407 is executed is a specific time, that is, shorter than the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the second interval effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, the display of the image IN2 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, but the attention image TGc continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started during the specific time period (within the specific period) after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion in the special state is started, Reminders regarding entanglement will continue to be implemented. When the variable game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGc to end with the input of the variable game start command. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started after the specific period from the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion in the special state, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended. Incidentally, regardless of whether the bet number is set before or after the specific period has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the second interval effect continues to be executed without ending, Reminders regarding entanglement continue to be implemented.

When the settlement command is input during execution of the second interval effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second interval effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGc is also ended. Even when the adjustment command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a calls a caution image when ending the second interval effect. The display of TGc is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed. Further, when the waiting time elapses without the bet number being set thereafter, if the replay is not given, the effect display device 14 executes the waiting effect, and is absorbed during the execution of the waiting effect. Warning is executed.

Next, the control related to the third interval effect will be described.
When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGe is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S410 of the special stagnation process, the non-special third stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the depression is executed.

When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN3 is displayed. When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. To do. When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control.

When the third interval effect is executed, that is, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a starts the measurement of the specific time after displaying the attention image TGe. When the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGe at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to control. In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the measurement of the specific time to the passage of the specific time corresponds to the specific period. Then, in the present embodiment, the execution period in which the stagnation control including the interval time measured in step S411 is executed is a specific time, that is, shorter than the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the third interval effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, the display of the image IN3 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, but the attention image TGe continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started during a specific time period (within a specific period) after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion in the specific state is started, Reminders regarding slipping in will continue to be implemented. When the variable game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the input of the variable game start command to terminate the display of the attention image TGe so that the effect display device is displayed. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started after the specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion in the specific state is started, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended.

Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the third interval effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third interval effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGe is also ended. Even when the adjustment command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the caution image to be displayed when ending the third interval effect. The display of TGe is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed. Further, when the waiting time elapses without the bet number being set thereafter, if the replay is not given, the effect display device 14 executes the waiting effect, and is absorbed during the execution of the waiting effect. Warning is executed.

Next, the control relating to the fourth interval effect will be described.
When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the attention image TGf is displayed. In this embodiment, after the special third stagnation start command is stored in the output buffer by the main control CPU 40a in step S410 of the special stagnation process, the special third stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding the depression is executed.

When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN4 is displayed. When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. .. When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control. In addition, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 to operate the heart movable body 25.

Further, when the fourth interval effect is executed, that is, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a causes the attention image TGf to be displayed and then starts the measurement of the specific time. When the variable game start command is input before the specific time elapses after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a displays the attention image TGf at least until the specific time elapses. The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to control. In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the measurement of the specific time to the passage of the specific time corresponds to the specific period. Then, in the present embodiment, the execution period in which the stagnation control including the opening time measured in step S411 is executed is a specific time, that is, shorter than the specific period.

Further, when the variable game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the fourth interval effect. To control. As a result, on the effect display device 14, the display of the image IN4 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, but the attention image TGf continues to be displayed. At this time, the heart movable body 25 operates to the origin 25a and returns to the origin 25a. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started during a specific time period (within a specific period) after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion in the specific state is started, Reminders regarding slipping in will continue to be implemented. When the variable game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the display of the attention image TGf to end when the variable game start command is input. Control 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started after the specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion in the specific state is started, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended.

Moreover, when the settlement command is input during execution of the fourth interval effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth interval effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the display of the attention image TGf is also ended. Even when the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed after the measurement of the specific time is started, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the caution image to be displayed when ending the fourth interval effect. The display of TGf is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting regarding the slip-in is executed, the effect display device 14 ends the alerting regarding the slip-in, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the caution regarding the intrusion is being executed, the performance executing means ends the execution of the invocation regarding the intrusion, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium is issued. Executed. Further, when the waiting time elapses without the bet number being set thereafter, if the replay is not given, the effect display device 14 executes the waiting effect, and is absorbed during the execution of the waiting effect. Warning is executed.

Here, the alerting regarding the inset that is executed in the slot machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described.
The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to execute a warning (shown in FIG. 15(d)) relating to the indentation executed by displaying the warning image GT3. Further, the slot machine 10 is related to the alerting (shown in FIG. 31(a)) relating to the engagement performed by displaying the attention image TGa and the engagement performed by displaying the attention image TGc. It is configured to be capable of executing alerting (shown in FIG. 31B). In addition, the slot machine 10 is related to the alerting (shown in FIG. 31(c)) relating to the engagement performed by displaying the attention image TGe and the engagement performed by displaying the attention image TGf. It is configured to be able to execute a warning (shown in FIG. 31D). Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the inset that is performed by displaying the alerting image GT3 corresponds to the alert regarding the inset that is performed during the execution of the standby effect. In addition, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the inset that is performed by displaying the alerting image TGa corresponds to the alert regarding the inset that is performed in the first bonus game state. Further, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the inset that is performed by displaying the alerting image TGc corresponds to the alert regarding the inset that is performed in the second bonus game state. In addition, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the inset caused by displaying the alerting image TGe and the alerting regarding the intruding performed by displaying the alerting image TGf are in the advantageous effect state. It is equivalent to a reminder about being engaged at a certain time.

The warning images GT3, TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf all show that "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. The character (character information) and "Let's be careful not to get caught. And the character (character information). In other words, the content of the alert regarding the indulgence executed during the execution of the standby effect, the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state, and the advantageous effect state is " Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. It is the content that displays the character. In addition, the content of the caution regarding the indulgence executed during the execution of the standby effect, the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state, and the advantageous effect state is " Be careful not to get caught. It is the content that displays the character.

As described above, the content of the alerting attention performed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alerting attention performed during the bonus game. In other words, the content of the alerting that is performed during the bonus game is the same as the content of the alerting that is performed during execution of the standby effect. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, when a single bonus game is generated among the bonus games, the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the content of the alerting attention performed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alerting attention performed during the specific bonus game.

Also, the content of the alerting attention that is performed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alerting that is performed when the state is in the advantageous effect state. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed in the advantageous effect state is the same as the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect. In addition, the content of the alerting attention performed in the bonus game state is the same as the content of the alerting attention performed in the advantageous effect state. In other words, the content of the alerting attention executed in the advantageous effect state is the same as the content of the alerting attention executed in the bonus game state.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is engaged in the standby effect, the first bonus game state, the second bonus game state, and the advantageous effect state. The content of the alert regarding is common and the same. On the other hand, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is different in the manner of calling attention to the intrusion.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15D and FIG. 31A to FIG. 31D, the attention display image on the effect display device 14 is the position where the attention image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14. It is different from the position where TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed. Further, the size of the attention image GT3 displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention image TGa, TGc, TGe, TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of characters (character information) included in the attention image GT3 is different from the typeface of characters (character information) included in the attention image TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf. In addition, the color of characters included in the alert image GT3 (so-called character color) is different from the color of characters included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert image GT3 is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf.

Similar to the first embodiment, regarding the image displayed when the attention is paid to the intrusion, the position to be displayed, the size, the display area to be displayed, the typeface of the characters included in the image, and the image included in the image. If at least one of the color of the characters and the size of the characters included in the image is different, it can be said that the manner of calling attention to the intrusion is different.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of alerting attention that is performed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the manner of alerting that is performed during the bonus game state. In other words, the manner of alerting regarding inset that is executed in the bonus game state is different from the manner of alerting regarding inset that is executed during execution of the standby effect. In addition, in the present embodiment, the manner of alerting attention that is performed during execution of the standby effect is different from the manner of alerting that is performed during the advantageous effect state. In other words, the manner of calling attention to the depression that is executed in the advantageous effect state is different from the manner of calling attention to the depression that is performed during execution of the standby effect.

As shown in FIGS. 31( a) to 31 (d ), the position where the attention display images TGa and TGc are displayed on the effect display device 14 is the position where the attention display images TGe and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. Different from Further, the size of the alerting images TGa, TGc displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alerting images TGe, TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention display images TGa and TGc are displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention display images TGe and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the typeface of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the typeface of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. The color of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of calling attention to the inset when executed in the advantageous effect state is different from the manner of calling attention to the inset that is executed in the bonus game state. In other words, the manner of alerting executed when the player is in the bonus game state is different from the manner of alerting that is executed when the player is in the advantageous effect state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of alerting attention to be carried out in the specific state is different from the manner of alerting attention to be performed in the special state.

As shown in FIGS. 31A and 31B, the position at which the attention image TGA is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position at which the attention image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the size of the alert image TGa displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alert image TGc displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGa is different from the typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGc. In addition, the color of the character included in the attention image TGa is different from the color of the character included in the attention image TGc. In addition, the size of the character included in the attention image TGa is different from the size of the character included in the attention image TGc.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of alerting regarding the inset that is executed in the first bonus game state is different from the aspect of alerting regarding the inset that is executed in the second bonus game state. .. In other words, the manner of alerting regarding the inset that is executed in the second bonus game state is different from the aspect of alerting regarding the inset that is executed in the first bonus game state. In the present embodiment, the first bonus stop eye corresponds to the first special display result, and the first bonus game state corresponds to the first special state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second bonus stop eye corresponds to the second special display result, and the second bonus game state corresponds to the second special state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the manner of calling attention to the slip-in that is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started in the first special state is that the execution of the stagnation control is started in the second special state. This is different from the mode of alerting for the invading after being performed.

As shown in FIGS. 31(c) and 31(d), the position at which the attention display image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position at which the attention display image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the size of the attention image TGe displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the attention image TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the attention image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the attention image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14. The typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGe is different from the typeface of the characters included in the attention image TGf. Further, the color of the character included in the alert image TGe is different from the color of the character included in the alert image TGf. In addition, the size of the character included in the attention image TGe is different from the size of the character included in the attention image TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the manner of alerting attention that is performed in the first advantageous effect state is different from the manner of alerting that is performed in the second advantageous effect state. .. In other words, the manner of calling attention to the devotion executed in the second advantageous effect state is different from the manner of calling attention to the devotion executed in the first advantageous effect state. That is, in the present embodiment, the first advantageous effect state corresponds to the first effect specific state, and the second advantageous effect state corresponds to the second effect specific state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the stagnation control is executed in the second effect specific state when the stagnation control is executed in the second effect specific state, after the execution of the stagnation control is started in the first effect specific state. It is different from the mode of alerting about being entangled after it is started.

Next, based on FIG. 32(a) and FIG. 32(b), the case of being in the first bonus game state and the case of being in the first advantageous effect state will be described.
As shown in FIG. 32A, when the tenth variation game in the first bonus game state is finished, the stagnation control is started at timing t51. In the stagnation control started at timing t51, measurement processing of a predetermined interval time is performed, and the stagnation control is continued at least for the interval time. When the execution of the stagnation control is started at the timing t51, the first interval effect is executed. At this time, the attention display image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention display regarding the intrusion is executed. It is also assumed that the bet button 18 is operated and the start lever 20 is operated at a timing t52 before the interval time elapses after the stagnation control is started. At timing t52, since the stagnation control is being executed, if the payout combination is won in the tenth variation game in the first bonus game state, the bet number cannot be set, or the variation game is changed. It cannot be started.

In addition, when the start lever 20 is operated after the interval time has elapsed from the timing t51 and before the specific time has elapsed from the timing t51 and the bet number is set at the timing t53, The eleventh variation game in the bonus game state is started, and the execution of the first interval effect is finished. However, from the timing t51 to the timing t54 when the specific time elapses, the attention display image TGa continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the intrusion is continued to be executed. On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated with the bet number set after the interval time has passed from the timing t51 and at the timing t55 after the specific time has passed from the timing t51, The 11th variation game in the 1 bonus game state is started, and the execution of the first interval effect is finished. At this time, along with the completion of the execution of the first interval effect, the display of the attention image TGa is also terminated, and the attention regarding the intrusion is finished.

Incidentally, if the waiting time elapses without setting the bet number even after the specific time elapses from the timing t51, the execution of the standby effect is started. Then, while the standby effect is being executed, the attention image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed. In this case, the first interval effect continues to be executed until the waiting time elapses, so that the caution display image TGa continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14 and the caution regarding the slip-in continues to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), when the tenth variation game in the first advantageous effect state ends, the stagnation control is started at timing t61. In the stagnation control started at the timing t61, measurement processing of a predetermined interval time is performed, and the stagnation control is continued at least for the interval time. When the execution of the stagnation control is started at the timing t61, the third interval effect is executed. At this time, the attention display image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention display is executed. It is also assumed that the bet button 18 is operated and the start lever 20 is operated at a timing t62 before the interval time elapses after the stagnation control is started. At timing t62, since the stagnation control is being executed, if the payout combination is won in the tenth variation game in the first advantageous effect state, the bet number cannot be set, or the variation game is executed. It cannot be started.

When the start lever 20 is operated after the interval time has elapsed from the timing t61 and the bet number is set at the timing t63 before the specific time has elapsed from the timing t61, the first lever The 11th variation game in the advantageous effect state is started, and the execution of the third interval effect is completed. However, from the timing t61 to the timing t64 when the specific time elapses, the attention display image TGe is continuously displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the slip-in continues to be executed. On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated with the bet number set at the timing t65 after the interval time has elapsed from the timing t61 and after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t61, The 11th variation game in the 1 advantageous production state is started, and the execution of the third interval production is completed. At this time, as the execution of the third interval effect ends, the display of the attention image TGe also ends, and the attention regarding the intrusion is ended.

Incidentally, if the waiting time elapses without setting the bet number even after the specific time elapses from the timing t61, the execution of the standby effect is started. Then, while the standby effect is being executed, the attention image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed. In this case, the third interval effect continues to be executed until the waiting time elapses, so that the caution display image TGe is continuously displayed on the effect display device 14 and the caution regarding the slip-in continues to be executed.

According to the third embodiment, in addition to the effects (5), (14), (15), (23), (25) to (39) and (49) to (53) of the first embodiment, It has such an effect.
(72) The stagnation control is executed when in the bonus game state (special state), and the warning regarding the intrusion after the execution of the stagnation control is started is executed. In this way, by performing the stagnation control in the bonus game state and temporarily interrupting the play, by executing the alert for the intrusion, the alert for the intrusion can be effectively executed. .. In particular, when in the bonus game state, the player's interest is likely to shift to the bonus game state and lack calmness. In such a situation where there is a high possibility of lack of calmness, by performing stagnation control and temporarily interrupting play, by executing a reminder about sneaking in, it is possible to more effectively scream about sneaking in. Can be executed.

(73) In the second bonus game state (second special state), and in the second bonus game state (second special state) The stagnation control is executed after the stagnation control is started at a certain time. As a result, it is possible to know which of the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state has occurred from the manner of calling attention to the entanglement. As a result, it is possible to raise the attention to the alerting regarding the intrusion, and it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the intrusion.

(74) When the stagnation control is executed in the bonus game state (special state), the specific image (for example, the image IN1 or the image IN2) displayed in the bonus game state is displayed without operating. Then, the operation of the specific image is stopped. For example, if a specific image moves while an attention-giving attention is being executed, the player's interest may shift to the specific image, but the specific image continues to be displayed without being operated. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in calling attention to the intrusion.

(75) The stagnation control is executed in the advantageous effect state (specific state) in which the bell navigation effect as the guide effect that guides the operation that can obtain a profit is executed, and the stagnation control is performed after the execution of the stagnation control is started. Warning is executed. In this way, by performing the stagnation control to temporarily suspend the play in the advantageous effect state, and then by executing the alert for the depression, it is possible to effectively execute the alert for the depression. .. In particular, when the player is in the advantageous effect state, the player's interest tends toward the advantageous effect state, and there is a high possibility that he/she lacks composure. In such a situation where there is a high possibility of lack of calmness, by performing stagnation control to temporarily suspend play, and then by executing a reminder about the sneaking-in, it is possible to more effectively scream about the sneaking-in. Can be executed.

(76) A mode of calling attention to the entanglement executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started in the first advantageous effect state (first effect specific state), and the second advantageous effect state (second effect specific state) ), the mode of calling attention to the slip-in that is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started is different. This makes it possible to understand which of the first advantageous effect state and the second advantageous effect state occurs, from the manner of calling attention to the entanglement. As a result, it is possible to raise the attention to the alerting regarding the intrusion, and it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the intrusion.

(77) When the stagnation control is executed in the advantageous effect state (specific state), the specific image (for example, the image IN3 or the image IN4) displayed in the advantageous effect state is displayed without operating. Then, the operation of the specific image is stopped. For example, if a specific image moves while an attention-giving attention is being executed, the player's interest may shift to the specific image, but the specific image continues to be displayed without being operated. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in calling attention to the intrusion.

(78) When the next variable game is started within the specific period, the alerting regarding the sneaking-in continues to be executed without ending. For this reason, at least within a specific period after the execution of the alerting for the intrusion is started, the alerting for the intrusion can be executed, and the alerting for the intrusion can be effectively executed. Further, when the next variation game is started after a specific period after the execution of the alerting attention is started, the alerting attention is continuously executed until the variation game is started. Therefore, even if the next floating game is not started within the specific period, it is possible to execute the alert regarding the intrusion until the next floating game is started after the specific period, and the alert for the infiltration is effective. Can be performed in a targeted manner.

(79) By performing the stagnation control to temporarily alert the player after the play is temporarily stalled, the attention to the entanglement is easily noticed. Further, the specific period is set to be longer than the execution period in which the stagnation control is executed in the bonus game state (special state). As a result, for example, if a player who is less interested in alerting to sneaking in is allowed to run the next variable game immediately after the end of stagnation control, but within a specific period, the alerting to sneaking in does not end. Continue to run. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the fact that the alerting regarding the intrusion is not completed, and it is possible to raise the interest in the alerting regarding the intrusion. As a result, it is possible to effectively carry out the alerting for the player's entanglement to the player who is not interested in the alerting for the entanglement.

(80) By performing the stagnation control to temporarily alert the play after the play has been stalled, it is easy to draw attention to the alert to the entanglement. Moreover, the specific period is set to be longer than the execution period in which the stagnation control is executed in the advantageous effect state (specific state). As a result, for example, if a player who is less interested in alerting to sneaking in is allowed to run the next variable game immediately after the end of stagnation control, but within a specific period, the alerting to sneaking in does not end. Continue to run. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of incongruity to the fact that the alerting regarding the intrusion is not completed, and it is possible to raise the interest in the alerting regarding the intrusion. As a result, it is possible to effectively carry out the alerting for the player's entanglement to the player who is not interested in the alerting for the entanglement.

(81) If the content of the alert regarding the indulgence executed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the content of the alert regarding the indulgence executed during the bonus game state (special state), each alerts a different event. There is a possibility that misidentification such as doing may occur. However, by making the contents of the caution regarding the indentation executed during the execution of the standby effect and the contents of the caution regarding the intrusion executed during the bonus game state the same, a common caution regarding the intrusion A reminder can be executed, and false recognition of the reminder can be suppressed.

(82) When the content of the alert regarding indentation executed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the content of the alert regarding indentation executed in the advantageous effect state (specific state), each is alerted to a different event. There is a possibility that misidentification such as doing may occur. However, by making the content of the caution regarding the indentation executed during the execution of the standby effect and the content of the alert regarding the inrush executed during the advantageous effect state the same,
It is possible to commonly issue a warning regarding intrusion, and it is possible to suppress misidentification of the warning.

(83) If the contents of the alerting notice executed when the player is in the advantageous effect state are different from the contents of the alerting notice executed when the standby effect is being executed or when the player is in the bonus game state, the contents are different. There is a risk of false positives such as alerting an event. However, the contents of the caution regarding the indulgence executed when in the advantageous effect state, the contents of the caution regarding the indulgence executed during the execution of the standby effect and the caution regarding the indulgence executed during the bonus game Same as the content. As a result, it is possible to perform a common alerting regarding the intrusion, and it is possible to suppress misidentification of the alerting.

(84) The manner of alerting executed when the standby effect is executed is different from the manner of alerting executed when the player is in the bonus game state. As a result, it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the depressing and to suppress the depressing depending on the situation during the execution of the standby effect and the bonus game state.

(85) The manner of alerting attention when the standby effect is performed is different from the manner of alerting attention when performing in the advantageous effect state. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively execute a reminder regarding the depression and to suppress the depression depending on the situation during execution of the standby effect and in the advantageous effect state.

(86) The manner of alerting regarding inset that is executed in the bonus game state is different from the manner of alerting regarding inset that is performed in the advantageous effect state. As a result, when the bonus game state is in effect and the advantageous effect state is in effect, a caution regarding the intrusion can be effectively executed and the intrusion can be suppressed.

(Fourth Embodiment)
Next, a fourth embodiment of the gaming machine will be described. The same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and detailed description and drawings thereof are omitted.

In the first embodiment to the third embodiment, the predetermined effect area in which the alert regarding the intrusion is executed and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 do not overlap with each other. In the fourth embodiment, the predetermined effect area in which attention is paid to the intrusion is executed and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body are made to overlap with each other.

As shown in FIG. 33A, in the fourth embodiment, when the heart movable body 25 does not operate, in a front view, in a predetermined effect area overlapping with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body. There may be a case where a reminder about being entangled is executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33B, in the fourth embodiment, when the heart movable body 25 operates, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is restricted. Specifically, in the fourth embodiment, when the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is restricted, the alerting regarding the intrusion in the effect area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in the front view is executed. In other words, in the fourth embodiment, when the heart movable body 25 operates, in front view, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion in the predetermined effect area overlapping the operation area of the heart movable body 25 is stopped, and the heart movable body 25 is stopped. Switching to the execution of alerting regarding the intrusion in the effect area that does not overlap the operation area. By the way, in FIG. 33(b), the predetermined effect area when the attention-related attention in FIG. 33(a) is executed is a broken line as an effect area when not restricted (shown as "unrestricted effect area"). It shows with.

33(a) and 33(b) exemplify a case where the attention image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 and attention is given to the intrusion, but other attention images TGa are shown. The same is true even when ˜TGd and TGf are displayed to call attention to the intrusion. That is, when the heart movable body 25 does not operate when the other attention images TGa to TGd, TGf are displayed and attention is paid to the intrusion, if the heart movable body 25 does not operate, a production area that overlaps the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. It is configured to execute a warning regarding the intrusion in.

The following describes the determination of whether or not the heart movable body 25 is in motion when the alerting regarding the inset is executed, and the effect area in which the alerting regarding the inset is executed.
In the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a carries out an action lottery for deciding whether to operate the heart movable body 25 after the final variation game in the first bonus game state or the second bonus game state. In the present embodiment, only when the set value is “3” and the internal mode is the third internal mode, it is possible to determine to operate the heart movable body 25 in the operation lottery. There is. Therefore, the operation lottery may be performed only when the set value is “3” and the internal mode is the third internal mode. In addition, in the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a carries out an action lottery after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state.

Then, when it is determined that the heart movable body 25 is not operated in the action lottery, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the predetermined caution image (any of the caution images TGa to TGf) to be viewed in front view. The effect display device 14 is controlled such that the effect display device 14 is displayed in an effect area that overlaps the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the heart movable body 25 is to be operated in the motion lottery, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the predetermined caution image (any of the caution images TGa to TGf) to be viewed in front view. The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the effect display device 14 is displayed in an effect area that does not overlap the operation area of the heart movable body 25. Further, when it is determined in the operation lottery to operate the heart movable body 25, the sub control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 to operate the heart movable body 25. As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined attention image (the attention image among the attention images TGa to TGf) is displayed in the effect area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in the front view. As described above, the effect display device 14 is controlled, so that the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is restricted.

In the slot machine 10 of the fourth embodiment configured in this way, when the heart movable body 25 operates, it can be specified that the set value is “3” and the internal mode is the third internal mode. .. That is, if the heart movable body 25 operates, it can be specified that the situation is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the operation of the heart movable body 25.

According to the fourth embodiment, the effects (5), (14), (15), (23), (25) to (39), (49), and (51) to (53) of the first embodiment are obtained. In addition, it has the following effects.

(87) When the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body does not operate, in front view, a reminder about the intrusion in a predetermined effect area overlapping with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 may be executed. On the other hand, when the heart movable body 25 operates, execution of alerting regarding the intrusion is restricted. As a result, the execution of the alerting regarding the indentation is restricted according to whether or not the heart movable body 25 is operating, and thus the alerting regarding the intrusion can be more effectively executed.

(88) When the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body operates, it is possible to identify an advantageous situation, so that it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the operation of the heart movable body 25. By increasing the degree of attention to the motion of the heart movable body 25, the degree of attention to the motion area of the heart movable body 25 can also be increased. If the warning regarding the devotion is executed in, the attention can be paid to the alert regarding the devotion. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively execute the alerting regarding the depression.

That is, it is possible to more effectively execute the alerting regarding the indentation while avoiding the situation in which the alerting regarding the intrusion due to the operation of the heart movable body 25 cannot be displayed.

The embodiment described above may be modified into another embodiment as follows, for example.
In the above-described first embodiment, the stagnation control is configured to be executed after one variation game (final game) in the single bonus game state, and a caution about the entanglement after the execution of the stagnation control is started May be configured to be executed. Further, in the second embodiment, the stagnation control is executed before the start of one variation game (first game) in the single bonus game state, and the stagnation is performed after the execution of the stagnation control is started. It may be configured so that an alert is executed. In addition, in the third embodiment, the stagnation control is configured to be executed in the single bonus game state, and the alert regarding the entanglement is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started. May be. Further, the type of bonus game state generated in the above embodiment may be changed, and for example, the single bonus game state may not be generated. That is, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a single bonus gaming state does not occur.

The ending times measured in the predetermined steps S203, S207, and S211 of the special stagnation process of the first embodiment may be the same or may be different. For example, the ending times may be measured in some processes. The ending time that is set may be different from the ending time that is measured by another process. In addition, the opening times measured in the predetermined steps S303, S307, and S311 in the special stagnation process of the second embodiment may be the same or different, and, for example, may be measured in some processes. The opening time that is set may be different from the opening time that is measured by another process. In addition, the interval time measured in the predetermined steps S403, S407, and S411 in the special stagnation process of the third embodiment may be the same or different, and, for example, may be measured in some processes. The interval time that is set may be different from the interval time that is measured by another process.

-The processing of step S203, step S207, and step S211 in the special stagnation processing of the first embodiment can also be regarded as stagnation control. Similarly, the processes of steps S303, S307, and S311 in the special stagnation process of the second embodiment can be regarded as stagnation control. Further, similarly, the processes of steps S403, S407, and S411 in the special stagnation process of the third embodiment can be regarded as stagnation control. As described above, when the processing after the output of the first stagnation start command to the third stagnation start command is regarded as stagnation control, the timing at which the stagnation control is executed and the timing at which the attention regarding the intrusion is executed, May be the same, and the configuration may be such that a stagnation control is started and a warning regarding the intrusion is executed. Further, the timing for executing the alert regarding depression may be before the timing for starting the execution of the stagnation control, and the configuration may be configured such that the stagnation control is executed after executing the alert for entering the depression. Good.

-The specific time may be different depending on the type of the alert image. For example, the specific time measured when displaying the attention image TGa and the specific time measured when displaying the attention image TGc may be different. With such a configuration, it is possible to set the specific time according to the situation, and it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the devotion according to the situation. That is, the specific time in the bonus game state (for example, the specific time measured after displaying the attention image TGa) and the specific time in the advantageous effect state (for example, the measurement measured after displaying the attention image TGc) Time) may or may not be the same. When all the specific times are the same time, the process of selecting the specific time according to the situation can be omitted, and thus the process performed by the sub control CPU 41a can be simplified. Further, the specific time (the length of the specific period) may be the same as the length of the execution period in which the stagnation control is executed, or may be longer than the execution period in which the stagnation control is executed.

-When the bet number (bet number) is set within the specific period, the execution of the alerting regarding the indulgence may be finished. In this case, it is not necessary to measure the specific time. In addition, when a bet (the number of bets) is set within a specific period, the manner of calling attention to the intrusion before and after the setting of the bet number may be different. For example, after the bet number is set, the attention is displayed in a display area different from the area where the navigation effect is executed (for example, the display area where the normal navigation images Na1 to Na3 and the bell navigation images Nb1 to Nb3 are displayed). The image TGa may be displayed. Similarly, when the start lever 20 is operated within a specific period after the re-play combination is won, the manner of alerting the user before and after the operation of the start lever 20 may be changed. For example, after the start lever 20 is operated, in a display area different from the area in which the navigation effect is executed (for example, the display area in which the normal navigation images Na1 to Na3 and the bell navigation images Nb1 to Nb3 are displayed), be careful. You may comprise so that the alert image TGa may be displayed. In the case of the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the navigation effect from being interrupted by the execution of the alerting when the variable game is started and the navigation effect is executed. Further, by changing (switching) the alerting aspect regarding the inset, it becomes easier to collect the player's line of sight with respect to the alerting about the inset, and it is possible to effectively execute the alert regarding the inset.

-A specific image (for example, the image 60 or the image 61, the specific acquisition number image GBc, the image OP1, the image IN1 or the like) may be operated and displayed on the effect display device 14 when the stagnation control is executed. .. For example, in the first ending effect, the image 60 may be configured to be shaken and displayed on the effect display device 14.

-At the time of shifting from the first advantageous effect state to the second advantageous effect state, it may be configured such that a reminder regarding depression is executed. Similarly, when shifting from the second advantageous effect state to the first advantageous effect state, it may be configured such that a reminder regarding depression is executed. In addition, when shifting from the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state to the special advantageous effect state, a warning regarding the intrusion may be executed.

-The type of effect state may be changed, and the transition mode of the effect state may be changed. For example, in the second advantageous effect state, when the variable game is executed, the advantageous stay frequency may not be subtracted, but the advantageous upper limit value may be subtracted. As described above, in the second advantageous effect state, the advantageous stay frequency may not be subtracted when the variable game is executed. Further, when a single bonus game state is generated, it may be configured to shift to a predetermined effect state. In addition, for example, when the winning of the single bonus combination is permitted, it may be configured to shift to a predetermined effect state when the single bonus combination is not won.

The type of game state may be changed, or the mode of transition of the game state may be changed. For example, the game state to be changed may be different between the case where the winning of the first bonus combination is carried over and the case where the winning of the second bonus combination is carried over.

-Although the warning about the intrusion is executed after the stagnation control is executed, the stagnation control may not be executed. For example, even when the stagnation control is not executed, it may be configured such that the alerting regarding the depression is continued to be executed at least within the specific period.

-The first end condition and the second end condition may be changed. For example, an ending condition that is satisfied when the advantageous upper limit value is greater than 0 when the remaining number of advantageous stays reaches 0 is the first ending condition, and when the number of remaining advantageous stays reaches 0. The termination condition that is satisfied when the advantageous upper limit value is 0 may be the second termination condition.

In the above-described embodiment, there may be a case where the normal effect state is shifted to the first advantageous effect state without passing through the preparatory effect state. For example, in a case where the advantageous transfer allowance information is stored in the main control RAM 40c, and when the promotion re-game combination is won, a value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state is set in the effect state flag. You may comprise.

・You may change the contents of the alert regarding the intrusion. For example, the content of the warning about being entangled is "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. Please be careful about the content that displays the character (character information) and "Inset." , Or the content of displaying the character (character information). For example, the alert image TGa says, "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. The character (character information) and "Let's be careful not to get caught. The image may include one of the characters (character information). In addition, the content of the alert regarding the intrusion is configured to include an alert regarding the intrusion into a plurality of pachinko gaming machines, rotating-body gaming machines, arrange-ball gaming machines, and ball-playing gaming machines. Good. For example, the alert image TGa shows that "pachinko, pachislot, arrange ball, and ball game machine are moderately enjoyable games. It may be an image including a character (character information).

-The contents regarding the return of the storage medium may be changed. For example, the alert image GTx is "Please be careful not to remove the prepaid card. The image does not have to include the character (character information). For example, the warning image GTx is "Please be careful not to remove the prepaid card. It may be an image that contains the characters (character information) or "Please note that the prepaid card is stolen. The image may include a character (character information).

If the manner of alerting is different, the position where the alerting image is displayed on the effect display device 14, the size of the alerting image, the display area where the alerting image is displayed on the effect display device 14, the alert image. It is not necessary for the typeface, character color, and size of the included characters (character information) to be different. For example, the position at which the attention image is displayed on the effect display device 14, the size of the attention image, the display area at which the attention image is displayed on the effect display device 14, the typeface and character color of the characters included in the attention image. The case where at least one of the sizes is different may be the case where the manner of alerting is different. Therefore, for example, the size of each image may differ only in the size of each image in the manner of calling attention to the inset that the attention image TGa is displayed and the manner of calling attention to the inset that the attention image TGb is displayed.

-The manner of alerting executed when the standby effect is executed may be the same as the manner of alerting executed when the bonus game is performed after the final variation game in the bonus game state. In addition, the alerting mode regarding indentation executed during execution of the standby effect may be the same as the alerting mode regarding indentation executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. Further, even if the manner of calling attention to the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state is the same as the aspect of alerting that is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state Good. In other words, a mode of alerting about the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect, a mode of alerting about the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state, and after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. The manner of calling attention to the slip-in performed may be the same. In addition, the same manner of alerting about the sinking executed after the final variation game in the first bonus game state and the aspect of alerting related to the sinking executed after the final variation game in the second bonus game state are the same. May be In addition, when the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous effect state is ended, an alerting mode regarding the intrusion that is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state and the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous effect is achieved. When the state is finished, the manner of calling attention to the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state may be the same. When the bonus game state is generated and the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, a mode of alerting about the inset that is executed after the final variation game in the bonus game state and the advantageous period due to the bonus game being generated The manner of calling attention to the inset that is executed after the final variation game when the ending condition of is satisfied may be the same.

-The manner of alerting about the indulgence executed during the execution of the standby effect may be the same as the manner of alerting about the indulgence executed before the first variation game in the bonus game state. In addition, the alerting mode regarding indentation executed during execution of the standby effect may be the same as the alerting mode regarding indentation executed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state. In addition, the same manner of alerting about the sinking executed before the first fluctuating game in the bonus game state, and the same manner of alerting regarding the sinking executed before the first fluctuating game in the advantageous effect state May be In other words, a mode of alerting about leaning in executed during execution of the standby effect, a mode of alerting about leaning in executed before the first variation game in the bonus game state, and a first variation game in the advantageous effect state. The manner of alerting the driver about the slip-in performed earlier than that may be the same. In addition, a mode of alerting about the entanglement executed before the first fluctuating game in the first bonus game state and a mode of alerting about the entanglement executed before the first fluctuating game in the second bonus game state And may be the same. In addition, an aspect of alerting regarding the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the first advantageous effect state, and an aspect of alerting regarding the inset that is executed before the first variation game in the second advantageous effect state And may be the same.

The manner of alerting executed when the standby effect is executed may be the same as the manner of alerting executed when the player is in the bonus game state. In addition, the manner of calling attention to the inset that is performed during execution of the standby effect may be the same as the manner of calling attention to the inset that is performed in the advantageous effect state. In addition, the alerting mode regarding the sinking executed in the bonus game state and the alerting mode regarding the sinking executed in the advantageous effect state may be the same. In other words, a mode of alerting about indentation executed during execution of the standby effect, a mode of alerting about indentation executed in the bonus game state, and a note about indentation executed in the advantageous effect state The awakening mode may be the same. In addition, the alerting mode regarding the inset when executed in the first bonus game state may be the same as the alerting mode regarding the inset that is executed during the second bonus game state. In addition, the manner of alerting regarding indentation executed in the first advantageous effect state and the aspect of alerting regarding indentation executed in the second advantageous effect state may be the same.

-The speaker 16 may be used to call attention to the depression. At this time, for example, the speech of the voice output from the speaker 16 may be used as the content of the alert regarding the intrusion, and the main voice (e.g., voice actor) may be an aspect of the alert regarding the intrusion. For example, “Pachinko/Pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game while the standby production is being performed. Please be careful not to get caught up in the line. May be configured to be executed by outputting a voice spoken by a man from the speaker 16 to call attention to the intrusion. On the other hand, "Pachinko/Pachislot is a moderately enjoyable game," after the final variation game in the advantageous production state. Please be careful not to get caught up in the line. ”And a voice spoken by a woman are output from the speaker 16 so as to execute a reminder regarding the intrusion. It should be noted that, when performing the alerting regarding the engagement by using the speaker 16, the alerting regarding the engagement by using the effect display device 14 may be configured to be executed together, or the engagement by using the effect display device 14 may be performed. It may be configured not to execute the alert regarding. It should be noted that, in the case of using the speaker 16 to call attention to the intrusion, the speaker 16 can function as a performance executing means.

Similarly, the alert regarding the return of the storage medium may be executed using the speaker 16. At this time, for example, the dialogue of the voice output from the speaker 16 may be used as the content of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium, and the voice (for example, voice actor) may be used as the form of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. In addition, when performing the alert regarding the return of the storage medium using the speaker 16, the alert regarding the return of the storage medium using the effect display device 14 may be configured to be executed together. It may be configured not to execute the alert regarding the return of the storage medium using the device 14.

・Part or all of the content of the alert regarding the devotion in each situation may be different. For example, the alert image GT3 says, "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. The character (character information) and "Let's be careful not to get caught. It is assumed that the image includes both the characters (character information). On the other hand, the alert image TGa says, "Pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. The character (character information) and "Let's be careful not to get caught. The image may include one of the characters "(character information)".

-The first embodiment to the third embodiment may be combined appropriately. For example, it is configured such that a reminder about the entanglement is executed before the first fluctuation game in the bonus game state is started, and a reminder about the entanglement after the final fluctuation game in the bonus game state is executed. May be. In addition, it is configured to execute a reminder about the entanglement before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started, and to perform a reminder about the entanglement after the last variation game in the advantageous effect state. May be. In addition, when the bonus game state is generated, the alert regarding the intrusion is executed before the first variation game in the bonus game state is started, while when the advantageous effect state is generated, It may be configured such that a warning regarding the intrusion after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is executed. When combining the first to third embodiments, the special stagnation process described in each embodiment may be performed.

-It is not necessary to call out the warning regarding the intrusion while the standby effect is being executed. In addition, in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the alerting regarding the intrusion after the final variation game in the bonus game state. In addition, in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the alerting regarding the intrusion after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state. Further, in the second embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the alerting regarding the intrusion before the first variation game in the bonus game state is started. Further, in the second embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the alerting regarding the intrusion before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started. In addition, in the third embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the warning regarding the intrusion during the bonus game state. Further, in the third embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the alerting regarding the intrusion in the advantageous effect state. For example, it may be configured such that the attention regarding the intrusion is executed at least one of after the final variation game in the bonus game state and after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state.

The execution or non-execution of the alert regarding the intrusion may be different depending on the effect state or the game state before the bonus game state is generated. For example, when a bonus combination is won and a bonus game state is generated in the normal effect state, a configuration is made such that a warning regarding the intrusion after the final variation game in the bonus game state is executed. On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won and the bonus game state is generated in the advantageous effect state, it may be configured to execute the alert regarding the intrusion after the final variation game in the bonus game state. Good. Similarly, the presence/absence of execution of a reminder regarding the inset may be different depending on the effect state or the game state before the advantageous effect state is generated.

The presence/absence of execution of the alert regarding the inset may be different depending on the effect state or the game state after the bonus game state is over. For example, if the normal effect state is set after the bonus game state is ended, a configuration is made such that a warning regarding the inset after the final variation game in the bonus game state is executed. On the other hand, if the advantageous effect state is reached after the end of the bonus game state, it may be configured such that a warning regarding the intrusion after the final variation game in the bonus game state is executed.

The ending effect may be executed while being controlled to the advantageous effect state. In this case, it is possible to make the user feel as if the advantageous effect state has ended, and by continuing the advantageous effect state after ending the ending effect, the interest can be improved. Further, the movable heart body 25 may be configured to operate when the advantageous effect state is continued. Further, as described above, when the advantageous effect state is continuously executed, it may be configured not to execute the alerting regarding the intrusion.

The volume of the character voice may be adjustable, for example, when the up button SBa or the down button SBc is operated even while the variable game is being executed. At this time, the volume of the background music may be unadjustable even if the right button SBb or the left button SBd is operated during execution of the variable game. Similarly, the volume of the background music may be adjustable when the right button SBb or the left button SBd is operated even while the variable game is being executed. At this time, the volume of the character voice may be unadjustable even if the up button SBa or the down button SBc is operated during execution of the variable game.

The volume may be adjustable by operating the menu button MB only during the period when the standby effect is being executed and only during the period after the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is completed. The volume may be adjusted by operating any one of the upper button SBa, the right button SBb, the lower button SBc, and the left button SBd without operating the menu button MB. At this time, the menu may not be displayed, and the volume may be directly adjusted.

-The type of alerting that is executed during execution of the standby effect may be changed. For example, the type of alerting performed during execution of the standby effect may be one type or two types. Further, in the above embodiment, more types of alerts may be executed than the alerts executed during execution of the standby effect. Further, it is not necessary to call attention while the standby effect is being executed, and for example, it may be configured so that the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed during the execution of the standby effect.

-While the standby effect is being executed, after the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB as the predetermined operation means is executed, the alerting regarding the inset may be executed. Further, during the execution of the standby effect, the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB may be executed when the alerting regarding the depression is executed. Further, even when the menu button MB is operated during execution of the standby effect, the standby effect may be continuously executed. In addition, when the alerting attention is being performed during the execution of the standby effect, the alerting attention may be continuously executed even when the menu button MB is operated.

-When the bet number (bet number) is set, the standby effect may be executed. For example, even when the number of bets (the number of bets) is set, the standby effect is not executed when the re-game is given, while the standby effect is executed when the re-game is not given. You may comprise. Further, when the standby time has elapsed, the standby effect may be executed even when the re-game is being given. That is, although the standby effect is not executed when the settlement button 19 is operated, the standby effect may be executed when the waiting time elapses.

Even if the settlement button 19 is operated while the attention-requiring attention is being executed, the attention-requiring attention may be continuously executed. For example, when the settlement button 19 is operated during the waiting period, the warning regarding the depression may be continuously executed. In addition, for example, when the attention alert regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is being executed, the alert alert regarding the inset is ended when the adjustment button 19 is operated. On the other hand, it may be configured such that while the alerting regarding the inset after the final variation game in the bonus game state is being performed, the alerting regarding the inset is continued even if the settlement button 19 is operated. In this case, the configuration may be configured such that when the alerting regarding the inset after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is being performed, the alerting regarding the inset is continued even if the settlement button 19 is operated.

-When the settlement process (settlement control) is performed when the settlement button 19 as the settlement operation means is operated, the standby performance is configured to start, and when the standby performance is being performed. You may comprise so that payment adjustment performance may be performed. In this case, while the standby effect is being executed, the warning regarding the return of the storage medium may be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the time required for the logo effect is longer than the time required from the start of the execution of the payment effect to the end of the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. According to this structure, it is possible to execute the alert regarding the settlement effect and the return of the storage medium before the various alerts are executed.

The period during which the settlement effect is executed and the period during which the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed may be partially or entirely overlapped. That is, when the settlement button 19 is operated, the settlement effect may be executed, and the caution regarding the return of the storage medium may be executed. In this case, it may be configured such that after the execution of the payment effect, the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed when the adjustment effect is being executed. In addition, the timing at which the execution of the settlement effect is started and the timing at which the execution of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is started may be the same. The settlement effect may be executed after the execution of the alerting regarding the return of the storage medium is started. It may be configured such that only one of the cautions regarding the settlement effect and the return of the storage medium is executed by the effect display device 14. For example, the effect display device 14 may be configured to call out a warning regarding the return of the storage medium and the speaker 16 to execute the payment effect.

The advantageous effect state may not be applied to the slot machine capable of generating, and for example, only the bonus game state of the advantageous effect state and the bonus game state may be applied to the gaming machine capable of generating. Similarly, the bonus game state may not be applied to the slot machine capable of producing, and for example, only the advantageous effect state of the advantageous effect state and the bonus game state may be applied to the gaming machine capable of producing.

The navigation effect may be executed even in an effect state other than the advantageous effect state. For example, the bell navigation effect may be executed in the preparation effect state. Further, the bell navigation effect may be executed even in the bonus effect state, that is, even in the bonus game state.

-In 2nd Embodiment and 3rd Embodiment, you may comprise so that a starry sky production may be performed, when the alerting regarding the inset is performed similarly to 1st Embodiment. In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the starry sky effect is executed before the next internal mode is determined, but the internal mode to be shifted after the bonus game state or the advantageous effect state is finished is inferred. In doing so, the internal mode before the transition may be helpful. Therefore, even when the starry sky effect is executed in the second embodiment or the third embodiment, the starry sky effect suggests or notifies the internal control state, thereby suggesting or notifying the degree of advantage related to the occurrence of the advantageous state. Can be said.

It is not necessary to execute both the appearance effect and the starry sky effect, and for example, at least one of the appearance effect and the starry sky effect may be executed. Further, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect may be executed after the alerting regarding the inset is executed. In the case of such a configuration, it becomes easier to draw attention to the effect display device 14 in which the attention-related attention is executed until the appearance effect or the starry sky effect is executed, and the attention-related attention is effectively executed. You can Further, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect may not be executed while the attention-giving attention is being executed. That is, it is not necessary to execute the specific effect that suggests or notifies the degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state.

-The appearance effect as the specific effect may be an effect that suggests the set value that has been set. For example, even if the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears in the above-described embodiment, only the degree of expectation that the setting value is “3” is high and the setting value is “3”. Need not be specified. Further, the appearance effect may be an effect that notifies the set value that has been set. For example, when the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the first character appears in the above embodiment, it may be possible to specify that the set value is “1”. That is, the appearance effect may be an effect that suggests a set value or an effect that notifies the set value.

The value that can be set as the set value does not have to be three levels of "1" to "3", and for example, the set value can be set from six levels of "1" to "6". .. Further, the slot machine does not have to be applied to the slot machine configured to change the set value.

The starry sky effect as the specific effect may be an effect that suggests the internal mode. For example, even if the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which the planets and stars are displayed in the above-described embodiment, only the degree of expectation of being in the third internal mode is high, and it is in the third internal mode. May not be specified. Further, the starry sky effect may be an effect for notifying the internal mode.
For example, in the above embodiment, when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which three stars are displayed, it may be possible to specify the first internal mode. That is, the starry sky effect may be an effect that suggests the internal mode or may be an effect that notifies the internal mode.

-The type of internal mode may be changed. For example, the types of internal modes may be two types or four or more types. Further, the internal mode as the internal control state may not be configured to be controllable.

-A part or all of the display area (predetermined display area) in which the caution image (for example, the caution image TGa) displayed when the caution regarding the slip-in is executed is displayed as the reel visual recognition area. It may be configured to overlap (overlap) with the transmissive region 14a. That is, the attention image may be displayed in the transparent region 14a, and the attention regarding the intrusion may be executed. In addition, the horizontal width of the alert image displayed when the alert regarding the slip-in is executed may be the same as the horizontal width of one reel in front view, or may be shorter than the horizontal width of one reel. Good.

The display area (predetermined display area) in which the caution image (for example, the caution image TGa) displayed when the caution regarding the intrusion is executed is displayed in the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body. It may be a region overlapping with the operation region. For example, when the heart movable body 25 does not operate, the attention image TGa may be displayed in an area overlapping the operation area of the heart movable body 25, and the attention regarding the intrusion may be executed. On the other hand, when the heart movable body 25 operates, the attention image TGa may be displayed in an area overlapping with the operation area of the heart movable body 25, and the attention regarding the intrusion may be executed. In addition, when the heart movable body 25 operates, it may be configured so that the warning regarding the intrusion is not executed. Further, the specific movable body may be the star movable body 26. The star movable body 26 may be configured to be operable toward the front side of the effect display device 14, or may be configured not to operate toward the front side of the effect display device 14 as in the above embodiment.

-In the said 4th Embodiment, you may change the conditions which the heart movable body 25 operate|moves. For example, if the set value is a set value having a higher degree of advantage than “1”, the heart movable body 25 may be configured to operate. In addition, for example, the heart movable body 25 may be configured to operate in an internal mode having a higher advantage than the first internal mode. In this way, the operation of the heart movable body 25 does not have to be determined based on both the set value and the internal mode. Further, the fourth embodiment may be adopted in the second embodiment. Similarly, the fourth embodiment may be adopted in the third embodiment.

-You may change the stop position of the symbols that make up the effective line. Further, the number of effective lines may be plural. For example, an effective line may be configured by the upper stop position of the left reel 13a, the middle stop position of the middle reel 13b, and the lower stop position of the right reel 13c. The stop positions of the symbols forming the effective line do not have to be the stop positions of the symbols located on a straight line. For example, the effective line may be configured by the upper stop position of the left reel 13a, the middle stop position of the middle reel 13b, and the upper stop position of the right reel 13c.

In the above-described embodiment, the main control CPU 40a may be configured not to store the winning information command in the output buffer when the lottery result of the winning combination lottery is incorrect. In this case, when the winning information command is not input, the sub control CPU 41a can specify that the lottery result of the combination lottery is out of alignment.

In the above embodiment, the value of the random number for the role lottery is not limited to the winning number even if the winning number of the winning combination of the symbol combination in which the prize is determined is allowed, and not limited to, for example, a predetermined effect (for example, It is also possible to configure so that a symbol combination (so-called chance chance) to which a privilege such as an additional effect is executed can be derived.

The carryover gaming state may be a gaming state in which winning of a re-gaming combination is more easily permitted than in the first gaming state. Further, the carry-over game state may be a game state in which it is difficult to allow the winning of the re-game combination as compared with the second game state.

The ending condition of either or both of the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state may be changed. Either or both of the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state have an ending condition when the number of variable games executed in the bonus game state reaches a predetermined number, as in the single bonus game state. , May be established. Also, the ending condition of the single bonus game state is configured to be satisfied when the number of medals awarded in the bonus game state exceeds a predetermined number, as in the first bonus game state and the second bonus game state. May be.

In the role lottery table, a predetermined number of bet numbers may be distributed among the values within the range that can be taken as the value of the role lottery random number, depending on the bet number (betting number). Good. For example, when the number of bets is small, it may be more difficult to win the winning number than when the number of bets is large. That is, when the bet number is small, the lottery result of the winning combination lottery may be more likely to be missed than when the bet number is large. Further, only when the upper limit of the bet number is set as the bet number, the winning number which allows the winning of the bonus combination may be won.

The above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine that can give a penalty to a player. It should be noted that the penalty may be applied to one variation game or to a plurality of variation games.

-It may be applied to pachinko machines. As described above, in a pachinko game machine, a game ball is a game machine used as a game medium. For example, when a warning image TGa is displayed on a display device included in a pachinko gaming machine to execute a warning regarding intrusion, the pachinko gaming machine corresponds to the gaming machine in which the first gaming medium is used as the gaming medium, and the slot machine. Corresponds to a game machine in which the second game medium is used as a game medium. In a pachinko gaming machine, a winning lottery such as a big hit lottery is performed on condition that the game ball is operated by operating the firing handle and the game ball enters the starting opening. There are a first starting port, also called a belly button, and a second starting port, also called an electric chu, in the starting port, and there is also a pachinko game machine equipped with both of them. Then, in the pachinko gaming machine, when the big hit is won in the win lottery, the big hit state is generated. In the pachinko gaming machine, when the big hit is won in the winning lottery, the big hit state is generated after the big hit display result is derived in the symbol variation game.

When the big hit state occurs, after the opening effect is executed, a round game in which the special winning opening (so-called attacker) is opened is performed a plurality of times, and the ending effect is executed after the final round game. Specifically, a predetermined opening time measurement process is performed, and when the opening time is measured, the opening effect is executed. Since the opening time is measured, the start of the first round game in the big hit state is delayed. During execution of the opening effect, that is, during measurement of the opening time, a specific image among the images displayed on the display device may be displayed without operating. In addition, after the processing of measuring the opening time is performed, the round game is performed a plurality of times. The round game is also called an open game, and when a game ball is allowed to enter the special winning opening and the game ball enters the special winning opening, the prize ball is paid out. In the round game, the special winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode. When the special winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode, the number of times the special winning opening is opened may be once or plural times. In this way, in the big hit state, the number of games in which the special winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode is more than one (a plurality of times). When a round game is played a plurality of times while the jackpot state is occurring, a predetermined interval time measurement process is performed between the round games. By performing the measurement process of the interval time, for example, the start of the next round game is delayed. In addition, after the final round game in the big hit state, the ending time is measured, and when the ending time is measured, the ending effect is executed. By measuring the ending time, the end of the big hit state is delayed. During execution of the ending effect, that is, during measurement of the ending time, a specific image among the images displayed on the display device may be displayed without operating. In this case, when the ending time measurement process is executed, the specific image continues to be displayed without moving, and the operation of the specific image is delayed. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, after the final round game in the big hit state, during the execution of the ending effect, for example, by displaying the attention image TGa, it is possible to execute the attention about the intrusion. Good. That is, you may perform the alert about the entanglement after the ending time measurement process is started after the final round game in the big hit state. As described above, in the case of performing the alert regarding the intrusion in the pachinko gaming machine, the alert regarding the intrusion after the start of the measurement processing of the opening time may be executed. Further, as described above, in the case of performing the alerting regarding the intrusion in the pachinko gaming machine, the alerting regarding the intrusion after the start of the measurement processing of the interval time may be executed. As described above, the opening time measurement process, the interval time measurement process, and the ending time measurement process can be regarded as freeze control.

In the pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to change the area in which the gaming ball flows down according to the operation amount of the firing handle, and within the pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to hit the gaming ball by left-handing and right-handing. There is also a pachinko gaming machine configured in. In a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to separately hit a game ball by left hitting and right hitting, for example, a big winning opening may be arranged in an area where the game ball flows when hitting right. In such a pachinko gaming machine, when a big hit state is generated, even if you hit left, you can not enter the game ball into the special winning opening, but by hitting right, you can win the game ball It is possible to gain profit by entering the ball. For this reason, there is also a pachinko game machine in which a right-handed guide effect is executed to guide that a profit can be obtained by right-handing when a big hit state is generated. It can be said that the right-handed guide effect is an effect that guides an operation that can obtain a profit. As described above, among the pachinko gaming machines, there is a pachinko gaming machine capable of producing a big hit state in which the right-handed guide effect is executed.

There is also a pachinko gaming machine in which a small hit state is generated when a small hit is won in the winning lottery, and such a pachinko gaming machine may be configured to execute a caution regarding the intrusion. .. The small hit state may be classified as a big hit state as well as the big hit state. Even in the small hit state, the special winning opening is opened. In the small hitting state, the large winning opening is often opened once in a predetermined opening manner. Here, "the number of times the special winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode is one time" does not mean that the number of times the special winning opening is opened is one. When the special winning opening is opened in some manners, the big winning opening may be opened multiple times. Further, the predetermined opening mode in the small hit state and the predetermined opening mode in the big hit state may or may not be the same. Thus, in the small hit state, the number of games in which the special winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode is one. The big winning opening that is opened when the small hit state is generated and the big winning opening that is opened when the big hit state is generated may or may not be the same. .. Further, among a plurality of types of winning states including a big hit state and a small hit state, the number of games in which the special winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode in the small hit state may be the smallest. Further, the number of game media that can be acquired when the small hit state is generated may be smaller than the number of game media that can be acquired when the big hit state is generated. For example, the number of game media that can be obtained when the small hit state is generated may be the smallest among a plurality of types of hit states including the big hit state and the small hit state. Then, when the big hit state is generated, the warning about the depression is executed, while when the small hit state is generated, the warning about the depression is not executed. That is, it may be configured such that when the small hit state is generated, the warning about the depression is not executed, and when the large hit state is generated, the warning about the depression is executed. By the way, regardless of whether it is a big hit state or a small hit state, even if the special winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening mode, the specified number of holes are opened before the special winning opening is opened in the predetermined opening mode. When the game ball enters the special winning opening, the opening of the special winning opening in a predetermined opening mode may be completed.

In the pachinko gaming machine, there is also a pachinko gaming machine that executes a standby effect. For example, while the standby effect is being executed in such a pachinko gaming machine, a caution image GT3 is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. You may. For example, the standby effect according to the present embodiment may be adopted as the standby effect in the pachinko gaming machine, and the configuration may be configured such that the attention regarding the intrusion is executed during the execution of the standby effect. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine, the content of the alerting that is executed during the execution of the standby effect may be the same as the content of the alerting that is executed after the final round game in the jackpot state. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine, the manner of alerting regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect may be different from the manner of alerting regarding the inset that is executed after the final round game in the jackpot state. Further, in a pachinko gaming machine having a movable body, an image (for example, an alerting image YGa) displayed when performing a reminder to sneak in the pachinko gaming machine It may be configured so that and the operation area of a specific movable body do not overlap.

The function of the main board 40 in the above embodiment may be realized by being divided into a plurality of boards. The main control CPU 40a may be composed of a plurality of CPUs mounted on a single board.

In the above embodiment, a payout board for controlling payout of medals as a game medium based on a control signal from the main board 40 may be provided, and the payout board may be configured to control the payout of medals in the above embodiment. Good. In such a configuration, the main board 40 and the payout board may serve as the main control unit.

The function of the sub-board 41 in the above embodiment may be realized by being divided into a plurality of boards. For example, a display board that specially controls the effect display device 14, a lamp board that specially controls the decorative lamp 15, and a sound board that specially controls the speaker 16 may be provided, and these board groups are collectively controlled. An integrated board may be further provided. The sub control CPU 41a may be composed of a plurality of CPUs mounted on a single board.

Next, technical ideas that can be understood from the above-described embodiment and other examples will be added below.
○ In a gaming machine in which a special state is generated after a special display result is derived, a stagnation control unit that executes stagnation control and a production control unit that controls the production execution unit are provided, and the production execution unit is embedded. Is to be executed, the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a reminder about the intrusion is executed. Characteristic gaming machine.

○ In a gaming machine capable of producing a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding a profitable operation is executed, a stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and an effect control means for controlling the effect execution means are provided, In the effect execution means, a caution regarding depression is executed, the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a caution regarding stagnation A gaming machine characterized in that arousing is performed.

○ In a gaming machine in which a game can be played on the condition that the number of bets is set, and a special state is generated after the special display result is derived, the game machine is provided with a production control means for controlling the production execution means, In the performance executing means, attention is paid to the intrusion, and when the execution of the attention to the intrusion after the last game in the special state is started, the infiltration after the last game in the special state is started. If the number of bets is set after a specific period of time has elapsed since the execution of the alerting regarding, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is ended, while the execution of the alerting regarding intrusion after the final game in the special state is started. A gaming machine characterized in that, when a bet amount is set within the specific period after the game is played, a warning regarding inaction is continued to be executed.

○ In the gaming machine capable of playing a game on the condition that the bet number is set, and in which a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding a profit-obtaining operation is executed can be generated, the effect executing means is controlled. When the production control means is provided, the production execution means is configured to execute a reminder regarding the intrusion, and when the execution of the reminder regarding the intrusion after the final game in the specific state is started, the specific state In the case where the number of bets is set after a specific period from the execution of the alerting after the last game in, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion ends while the invocation after the last game in the specific state is completed. A game machine characterized in that, when a bet number is set within the specific period after the execution of the warning regarding the above is started, the warning regarding the intrusion is continued to be executed.

In the gaming machine in which the first special state is generated after the first special display result is derived and the second special state is generated after the second special display result is derived, a performance control means for controlling the performance executing means. And the production execution means is configured to execute a reminder about the slip-in, and the number of game media obtainable when the first special state is generated is the second special state is generated. If the number of game media that can be acquired is greater than the number of game media that are obtained, and if the second special state is generated, the alert regarding the intrusion is not executed, and if the first special state is generated, the intrusion is involved. A gaming machine characterized by being alerted.

○ A gaming machine capable of producing a specific state is provided with a production control means for controlling a production execution means, and the production execution means is adapted to execute a caution regarding indentation. There are 1 specific state and a 2nd specific state, and when shifting from the 1st specific state to the 2nd specific state, a reminder about sneaking in before the first game in the 2nd specific state to be transferred is A game machine characterized in that, when not executed and when shifting from the first specific state to the normal state, a warning regarding the intrusion is executed before the first game in the normal state to be shifted.

○ In a gaming machine capable of producing an advantageous state, a production control means for controlling the production execution means is provided, and the production execution means is designed to execute a reminder about the intrusion, and the production execution means executes it. In the effect to be performed, there is a specific effect that suggests or informs the degree of advantage related to the occurrence of the advantageous state, and when the caution regarding the inset is being executed, the specific effect is configured to be executable. A gaming machine to do.

In a gaming machine capable of executing a standby effect, playing a game on condition that a bet number has been set, and capable of storing the number of game media as credits, a settlement operation means and the settlement operation. It comprises a settlement control means for performing settlement control on condition that the means has been operated, and a production control means for controlling the production execution means, and the production execution means is adapted to execute a caution regarding indentation. If the credit is 1 or more and the number of bets is 1 or more and the settlement operation means is operated, the effect execution means starts the execution of the standby effect, An amusement machine characterized in that a reminder about being entangled is executed during execution.

○ It is possible to execute the standby effect, the re-game is awarded on condition that the re-gaming combination is won, and the number of game media defined for the pay-out combination is awarded on the condition that the pay-out combination is won. In the gaming machine, a settlement operation means, a settlement control means for performing settlement control on condition that the settlement operation means is operated, and a production control means for controlling the production execution means, and the production execution means, While the standby effect is being executed, a warning regarding the intrusion is executed, and when the settlement operation means is operated after the re-gaming combination is won in the game, the settlement control is performed while The execution of the standby effect is not started, and when the adjustment operation means is operated after the payout combination is won in the game, the adjustment control is performed and the execution of the standby effect is started and the standby operation is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that a reminder about being entangled is executed during execution of a performance.

A gaming machine capable of using a game medium based on the value stored in a storage medium for a game, including a settlement operation means, and a settlement control means for performing settlement control on condition that the settlement operation means is operated, And a production control means for controlling the production execution means, wherein the production execution means is configured to execute a caution regarding intrusion, and the settlement operation means when the caution regarding intrusion is executed. When operated, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the intrusion is completed, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed.

○ In a game machine capable of executing a standby effect, it is provided with effect control means for controlling the effect executing means and a predetermined operation means, and the effect executing means is adapted to call attention to the intrusion. When the predetermined operation means is operated while the alerting regarding indentation is being executed during the execution of the standby effect, the execution of the alerting regarding intrusion is ended, and during execution of the standby effect, A game machine characterized in that, in the effect executing means, an effect concerning the operation of the predetermined operation means is executed after a warning regarding the intrusion is executed.

○ In a gaming machine capable of executing a standby effect and in which a special state is generated after a special display result is derived, an effect control unit for controlling an effect execution unit is provided, and the effect execution unit controls the standby effect. A reminder about sneaking in during execution is executed, and a scream about sneaking in after the last game in the special state is to be executed. The gaming machine is the same as the content of the warning about the inset that is executed after the last game in the special state.

○ In a gaming machine capable of executing a standby effect and capable of producing a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding a profit-obtaining operation is executed, an effect control means for controlling an effect execution means is provided, and the effect execution is performed. In the means, a reminder about the intrusion during the execution of the standby effect is executed, and a reminder about the intrusion after the final game in the specific state is executed, and is executed during the execution of the standby effect. A game machine characterized in that the content of the alert regarding the run-in is the same as the content of the alert regarding the run-in executed after the final game in the specific state.

A reel including a plurality of reels and a transmissive display, wherein the transmissive display is arranged on the front side of the plurality of reels, and the reel arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the display area of the transmissive display. A game in which a visual recognition area is included, and in a display area different from the reel visual recognition area of the display area of the transmissive display, a predetermined caution image is displayed to call attention to the intrusion. Machine.

A specific movable body, an operation control unit that controls the operation of the specific movable body, and a production control unit that controls the production execution unit, and the production execution unit includes a production region including a predetermined production region. And the production control means can perform a control to execute a reminder regarding the intrusion in the predetermined production area, and in the front view, the predetermined production area is an operation of the specific movable body. A gaming machine characterized by being an area that does not overlap with the area.

A specific movable body, an operation control unit that controls the operation of the specific movable body, and a production control unit that controls the production execution unit, and the production execution unit includes a production region including a predetermined production region. And the production control means can perform a control to execute a reminder regarding the intrusion in the predetermined production area, and when the specific movable body does not operate, the specific movement in front view. There is a case where a reminder regarding the intrusion is executed in the predetermined effect area that overlaps with the motion area of the body, and when the specific movable body operates, the execution of the reminder regarding the intrusion is limited. Amusement machine.

○ In a gaming machine in which a special state is generated after a special display result is derived, a stagnation control unit that executes stagnation control and a production control unit that controls the production execution unit are provided, and the production execution unit is embedded. Warning is executed, the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the special state is started, and the stagnation control is executed after the stagnation control is started. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

○ In a gaming machine capable of producing a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding a profitable operation is executed, a stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and an effect control means for controlling the effect execution means are provided, In the effect execution means, attention is paid to the depression, and the stagnation control is executed before the first game in the specific state is started, and the execution of the stagnation control is started. After playing, a game machine characterized in that a reminder about slipping in is executed.

○ In a gaming machine in which a special state is generated after a special display result is derived, a stagnation control unit that executes stagnation control and a production control unit that controls the production execution unit are provided, and the production execution unit is embedded. The stagnation control is executed in the special state, and the stagnation control is executed after the stagnation control is started. A gaming machine to do.

○ In a gaming machine capable of producing a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding a profitable operation is executed, a stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and an effect control means for controlling the effect execution means are provided, In the effect execution means, attention is paid to the depression, the stagnation control is executed in the specific state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a reminder to the depression is issued. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

○ When the predetermined warning image is displayed and the warning regarding the intrusion is executed, the special visual control means for performing special visual control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the reel is provided, and the special visual control means is the special visual control. In the control, an image of one color is displayed in the reel visual recognition area.

The content of the alert regarding the game machine in which the first game medium is used as the game medium, and the content of the caution regarding the intrusion is to call attention to the game in the game machine in which the first game medium is used as the game medium. In addition, the second game medium includes a warning about being absorbed in the game on the gaming machine used as the game medium.

10... Slot machine, 13a to 13c... Reel, 14... Effect display device, 14a... Transparent area, 15... Decoration lamp, 16... Speaker, 17... Medal slot, 18... Bet button, 19... Settlement button, 20... Start Lever, 21a to 21c... Stop button, 25... Heart movable body, 26... Star movable body, 30... Information panel, 40... Main board, 40a... Main control CPU, 40b... Main control ROM, 40c... Main control RAM, 41... Sub-board, 41a... Sub-control CPU, 41b... Sub-control ROM, 41c... Sub-control RAM, 45... Set value switch, BL... Backlight, EB... Production button, HU... Hopper unit.

Claims (4)

In a gaming machine capable of producing a specific state in which a special state is generated after the special display result is derived and a guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of obtaining a profit is executed,
Multiple reels,
A transmissive display,
Back light,
And a special visual control means for executing special visual control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the reel ,
The transmissive display is arranged on the front side of a plurality of reels,
The display area of the transmissive display includes a reel visual recognition area in which a reel arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized,
In a display area different from the reel visual recognition area in the display area of the transmissive display, a predetermined caution image is displayed to perform a caution for indentation ,
In the transmissive display, after the last game in the special state, the predetermined caution image is displayed to perform a caution regarding indentation,
If a warning regarding the intrusion after the last game in the special state is executed, the special visual recognition control is executed,
In the transmissive display, after the final game in the specific state, the predetermined caution image is displayed and a caution about the intrusion is executed.
When a warning about the intrusion after the last game in the specific state is executed, the special visual recognition control is executed,
When the special visual recognition control is executed, the backlight installed behind the reel is turned off, and an image of one color is displayed in the visual recognition area of the reel . The gaming machine is configured so that a game medium is returned to the player by operating a specific operation unit that can be operated by the player, and the game is played on the condition that the bet number is set. Can be done
If the execution of a reminder about the inset after the last game in the special state is started, the stake in the special state is set when the bet number is set during the execution of the reminder after the final game in the special state While the execution of the alerting is completed, the execution of the alerting regarding the intrusion is continued even if the specific operation section is operated while the alerting regarding the intrusion after the final game in the special state is being executed. The gaming machine described in 1. A specific movable body,
An operation control means for controlling the operation of the specific movable body,
When the specific movable body does not operate, in front view, the predetermined caution image is displayed in the display area of the transmissive display that overlaps with the operation area of the specific movable body, and the caution about the intrusion is executed. Sometimes,
When the specific movable body operates, the display area is different from the reel visual recognition area in the display area of the transmissive display, and does not overlap with the operation area of the specific movable body in a front view. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the predetermined attention image is displayed in the display area of the transmissive display, and the attention regarding the intrusion is executed . In the advantageous period including the period controlled to the special state and the period controlled to the specific state, the advantageous period ends when the termination condition of the advantageous period is satisfied,
When the special condition is generated and the condition for ending the advantageous period is satisfied, the aspect of the alert regarding the intrusion performed after the last game in the special state is that the special state is generated. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, which is different from a mode of alerting attention to being carried out after the last game in the special state when the condition for ending the advantageous period is not satisfied .